PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
®
Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC )
General Description
With its unique array of configurable blocks, PSoC® 3 is a true system level solution providing microcontroller unit (MCU), memory,
analog, and digital peripheral functions in a single chip. The CY8C36 family offers a modern method of signal acquisition, signal
processing, and control with high accuracy, high bandwidth, and high flexibility. Analog capability spans the range from thermocouples
(near DC voltages) to ultrasonic signals. The CY8C36 family can handle dozens of data acquisition channels and analog inputs on
every general-purpose input/output (GPIO) pin. The CY8C36 family is also a high-performance configurable digital system with some
part numbers including interfaces such as USB, multi-master inter-integrated circuit (I2C), and controller area network (CAN). In
addition to communication interfaces, the CY8C36 family has an easy to configure logic array, flexible routing to all I/O pins, and
current DAC a high-performance single cycle 8051 microprocessor core. You can easily create system-level designs using a rich
library of prebuilt components and boolean primitives using PSoC Creator™, a hierarchical schematic design entry tool. The CY8C36
family provides unparalleled opportunities for analog and digital bill of materials integration while easily accommodating last minute
design changes through simple firmware updates.
Features
67-MHz, 24-bit fixed point digital filter block (DFB) to
implement finite impulse response (FIR) and infinite impulse
response (IIR) filters
Library of standard peripherals
• 8-, 16-, 24-, and 32-bit timers, counters, and PWMs
• Serial peripheral interface (SPI), universal asynchronous
transmitter receiver (UART), I2C
• Many others available in catalog
Library of advanced peripherals
• Cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
• Pseudo random sequence (PRS) generator
• Local interconnect network (LIN) bus 2.0
• Quadrature decoder
Analog peripherals (1.71 V VDDA 5.5 V)
1.024 V ± 0.1% internal voltage reference across –40 °C to
+85 °C
Configurable delta-sigma ADC with 8- to12-bit resolution
• Programmable gain stage: ×0.25 to ×16
• 12-bit mode, 192-ksps, 66-dB signal to noise and distortion
ratio (SINAD), ±1-bit INL/DNL
Up to four 8-bit, 8-Msps IDACs or 1-Msps VDACs
Four comparators with 95-ns response time
Up to four uncommitted opamps with 25 mA drive capability
Up to four configurable multifunction analog blocks. Example
configurations are programmable gain amplifier (PGA),
transimpedance amplifier (TIA), mixer, and sample and hold
CapSense support
Programming, debug, and trace
JTAG (4-wire), serial wire debug (SWD) (2-wire), and single
wire viewer (SWV) interfaces
Eight address and one data breakpoint
4-KB instruction trace buffer
2
Bootloader programming supportable through I C, SPI,
UART, USB, and other interfaces
Precision, programmable clocking
3- to 62-MHz internal oscillator over full temperature and
voltage range
4- to 25-MHz crystal oscillator for crystal PPM accuracy
Internal PLL clock generation up to 67 MHz
32.768 kHz watch crystal oscillator
Low-power internal oscillator at 1, 33, and 100 kHz
Temperature and packaging
–40 °C to +85 °C degrees industrial temperature
48-pin SSOP, 48-pin QFN, 68-pin QFN, and 100-pin TQFP
package options
Single cycle 8051 CPU core
DC to 67 MHz operation
Multiply and divide instructions
Flash program memory, up to 64 KB, 100,000 write cycles,
20 years retention, and multiple security features
512-byte flash cache
Up to 8-KB flash error correcting code (ECC) or configuration
storage
Up to 8 KB SRAM
Up to 2 KB electrically erasable programmable
read-only memory (EEPROM), 1 M cycles, and 20 years
retention
24-channel direct memory access (DMA) with multilayer
AHB[1] bus access
• Programmable chained descriptors and priorities
• High bandwidth 32-bit transfer support
Low voltage, ultra low-power
Wide operating voltage range: 0.5 V to 5.5 V
High efficiency boost regulator from 0.5-V input through
1.8-V to 5.0-V output
0.8 mA at 3 MHz, 1.2 mA at 6 MHz, 6.6 mA at 48 MHz
Low-power modes including:
• 1-µA sleep mode with real-time clock (RTC) and
low-voltage detect (LVD) interrupt
• 200-nA hibernate mode with RAM retention
Versatile I/O system
28 to 72 I/O (62 GPIOs, eight special input/outputs (SIO), two
USBIOs[2]
Any GPIO to any digital or analog peripheral routability
[2]
LCD direct drive from any GPIO, up to 46 × 16 segments
®
[3]
CapSense support from any GPIO
1.2-V to 5.5-V I/O interface voltages, up to four domains
Maskable, independent interrupt request (IRQ) on any pin or
port
Schmitt-trigger transistor-transistor logic (TTL) inputs
All GPIO configurable as open drain high/low,
pull-up/pull-down, High Z, or strong output
Configurable GPIO pin state at power-on reset (POR)
25 mA sink on SIO
Digital peripherals
20 to 24 programmable logic devices (PLD) based universal
digital blocks (UDB)
[2]
Full CAN 2.0b 16-receive (Rx), 8-transmit (Tx) buffers
[2]
Full-Speed (FS) USB 2.0 12 Mbps using internal oscillator
Up to four 16-bit configurable timer, counter, and PWM blocks
Notes
1. AHB – AMBA (advanced microcontroller bus architecture) high-performance bus, an ARM data transfer bus
2. This feature on select devices only. See Ordering Information on page 116 for details.
3. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense.
Cypress Semiconductor Corporation
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
•
198 Champion Court
•
San Jose, CA 95134-1709
•
408-943-2600
Revised June 18, 2012
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Contents
1. Architectural Overview ................................................. 3
2. Pinouts ........................................................................... 5
3. Pin Descriptions .......................................................... 10
4. CPU ............................................................................... 11
4.1 8051 CPU .............................................................11
4.2 Addressing Modes ................................................12
4.3 Instruction Set ......................................................12
4.4 DMA and PHUB ...................................................16
4.5 Interrupt Controller ...............................................18
5. Memory ......................................................................... 21
5.1 Static RAM ...........................................................21
5.2 Flash Program Memory ........................................21
5.3 Flash Security .......................................................21
5.4 EEPROM ..............................................................22
5.5 Nonvolatile Latches (NVLs) ..................................22
5.6 External Memory Interface ...................................23
5.7 Memory Map ........................................................23
6. System Integration ...................................................... 26
6.1 Clocking System ...................................................26
6.2 Power System ......................................................29
6.3 Reset ....................................................................33
6.4 I/O System and Routing .......................................34
7. Digital Subsystem ....................................................... 41
7.1 Example Peripherals ............................................41
7.2 Universal Digital Block ..........................................44
7.3 UDB Array Description .........................................47
7.4 DSI Routing Interface Description ........................47
7.5 CAN ......................................................................49
7.6 USB ......................................................................51
7.7 Timers, Counters, and PWMs ..............................51
7.8 I2C ........................................................................52
7.9 Digital Filter Block .................................................53
8. Analog Subsystem ...................................................... 53
8.1 Analog Routing .....................................................54
8.2 Delta-sigma ADC ..................................................56
8.3 Comparators .........................................................57
8.4 Opamps ................................................................58
8.5 Programmable SC/CT Blocks ..............................58
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
8.6 LCD Direct Drive ..................................................59
8.7 CapSense .............................................................60
8.8 Temp Sensor ........................................................60
8.9 DAC ......................................................................60
8.10 Up/Down Mixer ...................................................61
8.11 Sample and Hold ................................................61
9. Programming, Debug Interfaces, Resources ............ 62
9.1 JTAG Interface .....................................................62
9.2 Serial Wire Debug Interface .................................64
9.3 Debug Features ....................................................65
9.4 Trace Features .....................................................65
9.5 Single Wire Viewer Interface ................................65
9.6 Programming Features .........................................65
9.7 Device Security ....................................................65
10. Development Support ............................................... 66
10.1 Documentation ...................................................66
10.2 Online .................................................................66
10.3 Tools ...................................................................66
11. Electrical Specifications ........................................... 67
11.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................67
11.2 Device Level Specifications ................................68
11.3 Power Regulators ...............................................72
11.4 Inputs and Outputs .............................................75
11.5 Analog Peripherals .............................................82
11.6 Digital Peripherals ..............................................99
11.7 Memory ............................................................103
11.8 PSoC System Resources .................................109
11.9 Clocking ............................................................112
12. Ordering Information ............................................... 116
12.1 Part Numbering Conventions ...........................117
13. Packaging ................................................................. 118
14. Acronyms ................................................................. 122
15. Reference Documents ............................................. 123
16. Document Conventions .......................................... 124
16.1 Units of Measure ..............................................124
17. Revision History ...................................................... 125
18. Sales, Solutions, and Legal Information ............... 131
Page 2 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
1. Architectural Overview
Introducing the CY8C36 family of ultra low-power, flash Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®) devices, part of a scalable 8-bit
PSoC 3 and 32-bit PSoC 5 platform. The CY8C36 family provides configurable blocks of analog, digital, and interconnect circuitry
around a CPU subsystem. The combination of a CPU with a flexible analog subsystem, digital subsystem, routing, and I/O enables
a high level of integration in a wide variety of consumer, industrial, and medical applications.
Figure 1-1. Simplified Block Diagram
Analog Interconnect
Quadrature Decoder
UDB
Sequencer
Usage Example for UDB
IMO
Universal Digital Block Array (24 x UDB)
8- Bit
Timer
UDB
UDB
UDB
16- Bit
PWM
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
Master/
Slave
22
12- Bit SPI
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
8- Bit
Timer
Logic
UDB
8- Bit SPI
I2C Slave
UDB
I2C
CAN
2.0
16- Bit PRS
UDB
UDB
FS USB
2.0
4x
Timer
Counter
PWM
Logic
UDB
UART
UDB
USB
PHY
GPIOs
GPIOs
Clock Tree
32.768 KHz
( Optional)
Digital System
System Wide
Resources
Xtal
Osc
SIO
4 to 25 MHz
( Optional)
GPIOs
Digital Interconnect
12- Bit PWM
RTC
Timer
System Bus
Memory System
EEPROM
SRAM
EMIF
FLASH
CPU System
8051 or
Cortex M3 CPU
Interrupt
Controller
Program &
Debug
Program
GPIOs
WDT
and
Wake
GPIOs
Debug &
Trace
PHUB
DMA
ILO
Boundary
Scan
Power Management
System
Digital
Filter
Block
LCD Direct
Drive
POR and
LVD
1.8 V LDO
SMP
Temperature
Sensor
Analog System
ADC
+
4x
Opamp
-
3 per
Opamp
Del Sig
ADC
+
4 x DAC
CapSense
4x
CMP
-
GPIOs
1.71 to
5.5 V
Sleep
Power
4 x SC/ CT Blocks
(TIA, PGA, Mixer etc)
GPIOs
SIOs
Clocking System
0. 5 to 5.5V
( Optional)
Figure 1-1 illustrates the major components of the CY8C36
family. They are:
8051 CPU subsystem
Nonvolatile subsystem
Programming, debug, and test subsystem
Inputs and outputs
Clocking
Power
PSoC’s digital subsystem provides half of its unique
configurability. It connects a digital signal from any peripheral to
any pin through the digital system interconnect (DSI). It also
provides functional flexibility through an array of small, fast,
low-power UDBs. PSoC Creator provides a library of prebuilt and
tested standard digital peripherals (UART, SPI, LIN, PRS, CRC,
timer, counter, PWM, AND, OR, and so on) that are mapped to
the UDB array. You can also easily create a digital circuit using
boolean primitives by means of graphical design entry. Each
UDB contains programmable array logic (PAL)/programmable
logic device (PLD) functionality, together with a small state
machine engine to support a wide variety of peripherals.
Digital subsystem
Analog subsystem
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 3 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
In addition to the flexibility of the UDB array, PSoC also provides
configurable digital blocks targeted at specific functions. For the
CY8C36 family these blocks can include four 16-bit timers,
counters, and PWM blocks; I2C slave, master, and multi-master;
FS USB; and Full CAN 2.0b.
For more details on the peripherals see the “Example
Peripherals” section on page 41 of this data sheet. For
information on UDBs, DSI, and other digital blocks, see the
“Digital Subsystem” section on page 41 of this data sheet.
PSoC’s analog subsystem is the second half of its unique
configurability. All analog performance is based on a highly
accurate absolute voltage reference with less than 0.1-percent
error over temperature and voltage. The configurable analog
subsystem includes:
Analog muxes
Comparators
Voltage references
ADC
DACs
DFB
All GPIO pins can route analog signals into and out of the device
using the internal analog bus. This allows the device to interface
up to 62 discrete analog signals. The heart of the analog
subsystem is a fast, accurate, configurable delta-sigma ADC
with these features:
Less than 100 µV offset
A gain error of 0.2 percent
INL less than ±1 LSB
DNL less than ±1 LSB
SINAD better than 66 dB
This converter addresses a wide variety of precision analog
applications, including some of the most demanding sensors.
The output of the ADC can optionally feed the programmable
DFB through the DMA without CPU intervention. You can
configure the DFB to perform IIR and FIR digital filters and
several user-defined custom functions. The DFB can implement
filters with up to 64 taps. It can perform a 48-bit
multiply-accumulate (MAC) operation in one clock cycle.
Four high-speed voltage or current DACs support 8-bit output
signals at an update rate of up to 8 Msps. They can be routed
out of any GPIO pin. You can create higher resolution voltage
PWM DAC outputs using the UDB array. This can be used to
create a PWM DAC of up to 10 bits, at up to 48 kHz. The digital
DACs in each UDB support PWM, PRS, or delta-sigma
algorithms with programmable widths.
In addition to the ADC, DACs, and DFB, the analog subsystem
provides multiple:
Uncommitted opamps
Configurable switched capacitor/continuous time (SC/CT)
blocks. These support:
Transimpedance amplifiers
Programmable gain amplifiers
Mixers
Other similar analog components
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
See the “Analog Subsystem” section on page 53 of this data
sheet for more details.
PSoC’s 8051 CPU subsystem is built around a single-cycle
pipelined 8051 8-bit processor running at up to 67 MHz. The
CPU subsystem includes a programmable nested vector
interrupt controller, DMA controller, and RAM. PSoC’s nested
vector interrupt controller provides low latency by allowing the
CPU to vector directly to the first address of the interrupt service
routine, bypassing the jump instruction required by other
architectures. The DMA controller enables peripherals to
exchange data without CPU involvement. This allows the CPU
to run slower (saving power) or use those CPU cycles to improve
the performance of firmware algorithms. The single cycle 8051
CPU runs ten times faster than a standard 8051 processor. The
processor speed itself is configurable, allowing you to tune active
power consumption for specific applications.
PSoC’s nonvolatile subsystem consists of flash, byte-writeable
EEPROM, and nonvolatile configuration options. It provides up
to 64 KB of on-chip flash. The CPU can reprogram individual
blocks of flash, enabling bootloaders. You can enable an ECC
for high reliability applications. A powerful and flexible protection
model secures the user's sensitive information, allowing
selective memory block locking for read and write protection. Up
to 2 KB of byte-writeable EEPROM is available on-chip to store
application data. Additionally, selected configuration options
such as boot speed and pin drive mode are stored in nonvolatile
memory. This allows settings to activate immediately after POR.
The three types of PSoC I/O are extremely flexible. All I/Os have
many drive modes that are set at POR. PSoC also provides up
to four I/O voltage domains through the VDDIO pins. Every GPIO
has analog I/O, LCD drive[4], CapSense[5], flexible interrupt
generation, slew rate control, and digital I/O capability. The SIOs
on PSoC allow VOH to be set independently of VDDIO when used
as outputs. When SIOs are in input mode they are high
impedance. This is true even when the device is not powered or
when the pin voltage goes above the supply voltage. This makes
the SIO ideally suited for use on an I2C bus where the PSoC may
not be powered when other devices on the bus are. The SIO pins
also have high current sink capability for applications such as
LED drives. The programmable input threshold feature of the
SIO can be used to make the SIO function as a general purpose
analog comparator. For devices with FS USB the USB physical
interface is also provided (USBIO). When not using USB these
pins may also be used for limited digital functionality and device
programming. All of the features of the PSoC I/Os are covered
in detail in the “I/O System and Routing” section on page 34 of
this data sheet.
The PSoC device incorporates flexible internal clock generators,
designed for high stability and factory trimmed for high accuracy.
The internal main oscillator (IMO) is the clock base for the
system, and has 1-percent accuracy at 3 MHz. The IMO can be
configured to run from 3 MHz up to 62 MHz. Multiple clock
derivatives can be generated from the main clock frequency to
meet application needs. The device provides a PLL to generate
clock frequencies up to 67 MHz from the IMO, external crystal,
or external reference clock. It also contains a separate, very
low-power internal low speed oscillator (ILO) for the sleep and
watchdog timers. A 32.768-kHz external watch crystal is also
supported for use in RTC applications. The clocks, together with
programmable clock dividers, provide the flexibility to integrate
most timing requirements.
Page 4 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
The CY8C36 family supports a wide supply operating range from
1.71 to 5.5 V. This allows operation from regulated supplies such
as 1.8 ± 5%, 2.5 V ±10%, 3.3 V ± 10%, or 5.0 V ± 10%, or directly
from a wide range of battery types. In addition, it provides an
integrated high efficiency synchronous boost converter that can
power the device from supply voltages as low as 0.5 V. This
enables the device to be powered directly from a single battery
or solar cell. In addition, you can use the boost converter to
generate other voltages required by the device, such as a 3.3-V
supply for LCD glass drive. The boost’s output is available on the
VBOOST pin, allowing other devices in the application to be
powered from the PSoC.
2. Pinouts
Each VDDIO pin powers a specific set of I/O pins. (The USBIOs
are powered from VDDD.) Using the VDDIO pins, a single PSoC
can support multiple voltage levels, reducing the need for
off-chip level shifters. The black lines drawn on the pinout
diagrams in Figure 2-3 through Figure 2-6 show the pins that are
powered by each VDDIO.
Each VDDIO may source up to 100 mA total to its associated I/O
pins, as shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1. VDDIO Current Limit
PSoC supports a wide range of low-power modes. These include
a 200-nA hibernate mode with RAM retention and a 1-µA sleep
mode with RTC. In the second mode the optional 32.768-kHz
watch crystal runs continuously and maintains an accurate RTC.
IDDIO X = 100 mA
VDDIO X
Power to all major functional blocks, including the programmable
digital and analog peripherals, can be controlled independently
by firmware. This allows low-power background processing
when some peripherals are not in use. This, in turn, provides a
total device current of only 1.2 mA when the CPU is running at
6 MHz, or 0.8 mA running at 3 MHz.
The details of the PSoC power modes are covered in the “Power
System” section on page 29 of this data sheet. PSoC uses JTAG
(4-wire) or SWD (2-wire) interfaces for programming, debug, and
test. The 1-wire SWV may also be used for ‘printf’ style
debugging. By combining SWD and SWV, you can implement a
full debugging interface with just three pins. Using these
standard interfaces enables you to debug or program the PSoC
with a variety of hardware solutions from Cypress or third party
vendors. PSoC supports on-chip break points and 4-KB
instruction and data race memory for debug. Details of the
programming, test, and debugging interfaces are discussed in
the “Programming, Debug Interfaces, Resources” section on
page 62 of this data sheet.
I/O Pins
PSoC
Conversely, for the 100-pin and 68-pin devices, the set of I/O
pins associated with any VDDIO may sink up to 100 mA total, as
shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2. I/O Pins Current Limit
Ipins = 100 mA
VDDIO X
I/O Pins
PSoC
VSSD
For the 48-pin devices, the set of I/O pins associated with
VDDIO0 plus VDDIO2 may sink up to 100 mA total. The set of
I/O pins associated with VDDIO1 plus VDDIO3 may sink up to a
total of 100 mA.
Notes
4. This feature on select devices only. See Ordering Information on page 116 for details.
5. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 5 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 2-3. 48-pin SSOP Part Pinout
(SIO) P12[2]
(SIO) P12[3]
(Opamp2OUT, GPIO) P0[0]
(Opamp0OUT, GPIO) P0[1]
(Opamp0+, GPIO) P0[2]
(Opamp0-/EXTREF0, GPIO) P0[3]
VDDIO0
(Opamp2+, GPIO) P0[4]
(Opamp2-, GPIO) P0[5]
(IDAC0, GPIO) P0[6]
(IDAC2, GPIO) P0[7]
VCCD
VSSD
VDDD
(GPIO) P2[3]
(GPIO) P2[4]
VDDIO2
(GPIO) P2[5]
(GPIO) P2[6]
(GPIO) P2[7]
VSSB
IND
VBOOST
VBAT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
48
47
Lines show 46
VDDIO to
45
I/O supply
association 44
43
42
41
40
39
38
SSOP 37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
VDDA
VSSA
VCCA
P15[3] (GPIO, KHZ XTAL: XI)
P15[2] (GPIO, KHZ XTAL: XO)
P12[1] (SIO, I2C1: SDA)
P12[0] (SIO, I2C1: SCL)
VDDIO3
P15[1] (GPIO, MHZ XTAL: XI)
P15[0] (GPIO, MHZ XTAL: XO)
VCCD
VSSD
VDDD
[6]
P15[7] (USBIO, D-, SWDCK)
P15[6] (USBIO, D+, SWDIO) [6]
P1[7] (GPIO)
P1[6] (GPIO)
VDDIO1
P1[5] (GPIO, NTRST)
P1[4] (GPIO, TDI)
P1[3] (GPIO, TDO, SWV)
P1[2] (GPIO, CONFIGURABLE XRES)
P1[1] (GPIO, TCK, SWDCK)
P1[0] (GPIO, TMS, SWDIO)
48 P2[5] (GPIO)
47 VDDIO2
46 P2[4] (GPIO)
45 P2[3] (GPIO)
44 VDDD
43 VSSD
42 VCCD
41
P0[7] (IDAC2, GPIO)
40
P0[6] (IDAC0, GPIO)
39
P0[5] (Opamp2-, GPIO)
38
P0[4] (Opamp2+, GPIO)
37 VDDIO0
Figure 2-4. 48-pin QFN Part Pinout[7]
(GPIO) P2[6]
(GPIO) P2[7]
1
2
VSSB
IND
VB
VBAT
(GPIO, TMS, SWDIO) P1[0]
(GPIO, TCK, SWDCK) P1[1]
(GPIO, Configurable XRES) P1[2]
(GPIO, TDO, SWV) P1[3]
(GPIO, TDI) P1[4]
(GPIO, nTRST) P1[5]
3
4
5
6
Lines show
VDDIO to I/O
supply association
QFN
(Top View)
VDDIO1
(GPIO) P1[6]
(GPIO) P1[7]
[6]
(USBIO, D+, SWDIO) P15[6]
[6] (USBIO, D-, SWDCK) P15[7]
VDDD
VSSD
VCCD
(GPIO, MHZ XTAL: XO) P15[0]
(GPIO, MHZ XTAL: XI) P15[1]
VDDIO3
(SIO, I2C1: SCL) P12[0]
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
7
8
9
10
11
12
36 P0[3] (Opamp0-/Extref0, GPIO)
35 P0[2] (Opamp0+, GPIO)
34 P0[1] (Opamp0OUT, GPIO)
33 P0[0] (Opamp2OUT, GPIO)
32 P12[3] (SIO)
31 P12[2] (SIO)
30 VDDA
29 VSSA
28 VCCA
27 P15[3] (GPIO, KHZ XTAL: XI)
26 P15[2] (GPIO, KHZ XTAL: XO)
25 P12[1] (SIO, I2C1: SDA)
Notes
6. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on devices without USB. The pin must be left floating.
7. The center pad on the QFN package should be connected to digital ground (VSSD) for best mechanical, thermal, and electrical performance. If not connected to
ground, it should be electrically floated and not connected to any other signal.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 6 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
P2[5] (GPIO)
VDDIO2
P2[4] (GPIO)
P2[3] (GPIO)
P2[2] (GPIO)
P2[1] (GPIO)
P2[0] (GPIO)
P15[5] (GPOI)
P15[4] (GPIO)
VDDD
VSSD
VCCD
P0[7] (GPIO, IDAC2)
P0[6] (GPIO, IDAC0)
P0[5] (GPIO, Opamp2-)
P0[4] (GPIO, Opamp2+)
VDDIO0
Figure 2-5. 68-pin QFN Part Pinout[10]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
51
50
Lines show VDDIO
to I/O supply
association
QFN
(Top View)
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
P0[3] (GPIO, Opamp0-/EXTREF0)
P0[2] (GPIO,Opamp0+)
P0[1] (GPIO, Opamp0OUT)
P0[0] (GPIO, Opamp2OUT)
P12[3] (SIO)
P12[2] (SIO)
VSSD
VDDA
VSSA
VCCA
P15[3] (GPIO, KHZ XTAL: XI)
P15[2] (GPIO, KHZ XTAL: XO)
P12[1] (SIO, I2C1: SDA)
P12[0] (SIO, 12C1: SCL)
[9]
P3[7] (GPIO, Opamp3OUT)
[9]
P3[6] (GPIO, Opamp1OUT)
VDDIO3
(GPIO) P1[6]
(GPIO) P1[7]
(SIO) P12[6]
(SIO) P12[7]
[8]
(USBIO, D+, SWDIO) P15[6]
[8] (USBIO, D-, SWDCK) P15[7]
VDDD
VSSD
VCCD
(MHZ XTAL: XO, GPIO) P15[0]
(MHZ XTAL: XI, GPIO) P15[1]
(IDAC1, GPIO) P3[0]
(IDAC3, GPIO) P3[1]
[9]
(OPAMP3-/EXTREF1, GPIO) P3[2]
[9] (OPAMP3+, GPIO) P3[3]
(OPAMP1-, GPIO) P3[4]
[9]
(OPAMP1+, GPIO) P3[5]
[9]
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
(GPIO) P2[6]
(GPIO) P2[7]
(I2C0: SCL, SIO) P12[4]
(I2C0: SDA, SIO) P12[5]
VSSB
IND
VBOOST
VBAT
VSSD
XRES
(TMS, SWDIO, GPIO) P1[0]
(TCK, SWDCK, GPIO) P1[1]
(CONFIGURABLE XRES, GPIO) P1[2]
(TDO, SWV, GPIO) P1[3]
(TDI, GPIO) P1[4]
(NTRST, GPIO) P1[5]
VDDIO1
Notes
8. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on devices without USB. The pin must be left floating.
9. This feature on select devices only. See Ordering Information on page 116 for details.
10. The center pad on the QFN package should be connected to digital ground (VSSD) for best mechanical, thermal, and electrical performance. If not connected to
ground, it should be electrically floated and not connected to any other signal.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 7 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
75
74
LINES SHOW
VDDIO TO I/O
SUPPLY
ASSOCIATION
TQFP
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
VDDIO0
P0[3] (GPIO, Opamp0-/EXTREF0)
P0[2] (GPIO, Opamp0+)
P0[1] (GPIO, Opamp0OUT)
P0[0] (GPIO, Opamp2OUT)
P4[1] (GPIO)
P4[0] (GPIO)
P12[3] (SIO)
P12[2] (SIO)
VSSD
VDDA
VSSA
VCCA
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
P15[3] (GPIO, KHZ XTAL: XI)
P15[2] (GPIO, KHZ XTAL: XO)
P12[1] (SIO, I2C1: SDA)
P12[0] (SIO, I2C1: SCL)
P3[7] (GPIO, Opamp3OUT)
P3[6] (GPIO, Opamp1OUT)
[12]
[12]
VDDIO1
(GPIO) P1[6]
(GPIO) P1[7]
(SIO) P12[6]
(SIO) P12[7]
(GPIO) P5[4]
(GPIO) P5[5]
(GPIO) P5[6]
(GPIO) P5[7]
[11]
(USBIO, D+, SWDIO) P15[6]
[11]
(USBIO, D-, SWDCK) P15[7]
VDDD
VSSD
VCCD
NC
NC
(MHZ XTAL: XO, GPIO) P15[0]
(MHZ XTAL: XI, GPIO) P15[1]
(IDAC1, GPIO) P3[0]
(IDAC3, GPIO) P3[1]
(OPAMP3-/EXTREF1, GPIO) P3[2]
[12]
(Opamp3+, GPIO) P3[3]
[12]
(Opamp1-, GPIO) P3[4]
[12] (Opamp1+, GPIO) P3[5]
[12]
VDDIO3
(GPIO) P2[5]
(GPIO) P2[6]
(GPIO) P2[7]
(I2C0: SCL, SIO) P12[4]
(I2C0: SDA, SIO) P12[5]
(GPIO) P6[4]
(GPIO) P6[5]
(GPIO) P6[6]
(GPIO) P6[7]
VSSB
IND
VBOOST
VBAT
VSSD
XRES
(GPIO) P5[0]
(GPIO) P5[1]
(GPIO) P5[2]
(GPIO) P5[3]
(TMS, SWDIO, GPIO) P1[0]
(TCK, SWDCK, GPIO) P1[1]
(CONFIGURABLE XRES, GPIO) P1[2]
(TDO, SWV, GPIO) P1[3]
(TDI, GPIO) P1[4]
(NTRST, GPIO) P1[5]
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
VDDIO2
P2[4] (GPIO)
P2[3] (GPIO)
P2[2] (GPIO)
P2[1] (GPIO)
P2[0] (GPIO)
P15[5] (GPIO)
P15[4] (GPIO)
P6[3] (GPIO)
P6[2] (GPIO)
P6[1] (GPIO)
P6[0] (GPIO)
VDDD
VSSD
VCCD
P4[7] (GPIO)
P4[6] (GPIO)
P4[5] (GPIO)
P4[4] (GPIO)
P4[3] (GPIO)
P4[2] (GPIO)
P0[7] (GPIO, IDAC2)
P0[6] (GPIO, IDAC0)
P0[5] (GPIO, Opamp2-)
P0[4] (GPIO, Opamp2+)
Figure 2-6. 100-pin TQFP Part Pinout
Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8 on page 10 show an example schematic and an example PCB layout, for the 100-pin TQFP part, for optimal
analog performance on a two-layer board.
The two pins labeled VDDD must be connected together.
The two pins labeled Vccd must be connected together, with capacitance added, as shown in Figure 2-7 and Power System on
page 29. The trace between the two Vccd pins should be as short as possible.
The two pins labeled VSSD must be connected together.
For information on circuit board layout issues for mixed signals, refer to the application note AN57821 - Mixed Signal Circuit Board
Layout Considerations for PSoC® 3 and PSoC 5.
Notes
11. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on devices without USB. The pin must be left floating.
12. This feature on select devices only. See Ordering Information on page 116 for details.
13. The center pad on the QFN package should be connected to digital ground (VSSD) for best mechanical, thermal, and electrical performance. If not connected to
ground, it should be electrically floated and not connected to any other signal.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 8 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 2-7. Example Schematic for 100-pin TQFP Part With Power Connections
Vddd
Vddd
C1
1 uF
Vddd
C2
0.1 uF
P2[5]
P2[6]
P2[7]
P12[4], SIO
P12[5], SIO
P6[4]
P6[5]
P6[6]
P6[7]
Vssb
Ind
Vboost
Vbat
Vssd
XRES
P5[0]
P5[1]
P5[2]
P5[3]
P1[0], SWDIO, TMS
P1[1], SWDCK, TCK
P1[2]
P1[3], SWV, TDO
P1[4], TDI
P1[5], nTRST
Vddio0
OA0-, REF0, P0[3]
OA0+, P0[2]
OA0out, P0[1]
OA2out, P0[0]
P4[1]
P4[0]
SIO, P12[3]
SIO, P12[2]
Vssd
Vdda
Vssa
Vcca
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
kHzXin, P15[3]
kHzXout, P15[2]
SIO, P12[1]
SIO, P12[0]
OA3out, P3[7]
OA1out, P3[6]
Vddio1
P1[6]
P1[7]
P12[6], SIO
P12[7], SIO
P5[4]
P5[5]
P5[6]
P5[7]
USB D+, P15[6]
USB D-, P15[7]
Vddd
Vssd
Vccd
NC
NC
P15[0], MHzXout
P15[1], MHzXin
P3[0], IDAC1
P3[1], IDAC3
P3[2], OA3-, REF1
P3[3], OA3+
P3[4], OA1P3[5], OA1+
Vddio3
Vssd
Vdda
Vddd
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
C8
0.1 uF
C17
1 uF
Vssd
Vssd
Vssa
Vdda
Vssd
Vdda
Vssa
Vcca
C9
1 uF
C10
0.1 uF
Vssa
Vddd
C11
0.1 uF
Vddd
C12
0.1 uF
Vssd
Vddd
Vccd
Vssd
Vssd
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Vssd
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Vssd
Vddio2
P2[4]
P2[3]
P2[2]
P2[1]
P2[0]
P15[5]
P15[4]
P6[3]
P6[2]
P6[1]
P6[0]
Vddd
Vssd
Vccd
P4[7]
P4[6]
P4[5]
P4[4]
P4[3]
P4[2]
IDAC2, P0[7]
IDAC0, P0[6]
OA2-, P0[5]
OA2+, P0[4]
Vssd
Vddd
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
Vddd
88
Vssd
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
Vccd
C6
0.1 uF
C15
1 uF
C16
0.1 uF
Vssd
Vssd
Note The two Vccd pins must be connected together with as short a trace as possible. A trace under the device is recommended, as
shown in Figure 2-8 on page 10.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 9 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 2-8. Example PCB Layout for 100-pin TQFP Part for Optimal Analog Performance
Vssa
Vddd
Vssd
Vdda
Vssa
Plane
Vssd
Plane
3. Pin Descriptions
IDAC0, IDAC1, IDAC2, IDAC3. Low resistance output pin for
high current DACs (IDAC).
Opamp0out, Opamp1out[15], Opamp2out, Opamp3out[15].
High current output of uncommitted opamp.[14]
Extref0, Extref1. External reference input to the analog system.
Opamp0–, Opamp1–[15], Opamp2–, Opamp3–[15]. Inverting
input to uncommitted opamp.
SIO. Special I/O provides interfaces to the CPU, digital
peripherals and interrupts with a programmable high threshold
voltage, analog comparator, high sink current, and high
impedance state when the device is unpowered.
SWDCK. Serial wire debug clock programming and debug port
connection.
SWDIO. Serial wire debug input and output programming and
debug port connection.
SWV. Single wire viewer debug output.
Opamp0+, Opamp1+[15], Opamp2+, Opamp3+[15].
TCK. JTAG test clock programming and debug port connection.
Noninverting input to uncommitted opamp.
TDI. JTAG test data in programming and debug port connection.
GPIO. General purpose I/O pin provides interfaces to the CPU,
digital peripherals, analog peripherals, interrupts, LCD segment
drive, and CapSense.[14]
TDO. JTAG test data out programming and debug port
connection.
I2C0: SCL, I2C1: SCL. I2C SCL line providing wake from sleep
on an address match. Any I/O pin can be used for I2C SCL if
wake from sleep is not required.
I2
I2C0: SDA, I2C1: SDA. C SDA line providing wake from sleep
on an address match. Any I/O pin can be used for I2C SDA if
wake from sleep is not required.
TMS. JTAG test mode select programming and debug port
connection.
USBIO, D+. Provides D+ connection directly to a USB 2.0 bus.
May be used as a digital I/O pin. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on
devices without USB.
Ind. Inductor connection to boost pump.
USBIO, D–. Provides D– connection directly to a USB 2.0 bus.
May be used as a digital I/O pin. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on
devices without USB.
kHz XTAL: Xo, kHz XTAL: Xi. 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator pin.
VBOOST. Power sense connection to boost pump.
MHz XTAL: Xo, MHz XTAL: Xi. 4 to 25 MHz crystal oscillator pin.
VBAT. Battery supply to boost pump.
nTRST. Optional JTAG Test Reset programming and debug port
connection to reset the JTAG connection.
Notes
14. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense.
15. This feature on select devices only. See Ordering Information on page 116 for details.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 10 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
VCCA. Output of the analog core regulator or the input to
the analog core. Requires a 1uF capacitor to VSSA. The
regulator output is not designed to drive external circuits. Note
that if you use the device with an external core regulator
(externally regulated mode), the voltage applied to this pin
must not exceed the allowable range of 1.71 V to 1.89 V.
When using the internal core regulator, (internally regulated
mode, the default), do not tie any power to this pin. For details
see Power System on page 29.
VCCD. Output of the digital core regulator or the input to the
digital core. The two VCCD pins must be shorted together, with
the trace between them as short as possible, and a 1uF capacitor
to VSSD. The regulator output is not designed to drive external
circuits. Note that if you use the device with an external core
regulator (externally regulated mode), the voltage applied to
this pin must not exceed the allowable range of 1.71 V to
1.89 V. When using the internal core regulator (internally
regulated mode, the default), do not tie any power to this pin. For
details see Power System on page 29.
VDDA. Supply for all analog peripherals and analog core
regulator. VDDA must be the highest voltage present on the
device. All other supply pins must be less than or equal to
VDDA.
VDDIO0, VDDIO1, VDDIO2, VDDIO3. Supply for I/O pins. See
pinouts for specific I/O pin to VDDIO mapping. Each VDDIO must
be tied to a valid operating voltage (1.71 V to 5.5 V), and must
be less than or equal to VDDA.
XRES (and configurable XRES). External reset pin. Active low
with internal pull-up. Pin P1[2] may be configured to be a XRES
pin; see “Nonvolatile Latches (NVLs)” on page 22.
4. CPU
4.1 8051 CPU
The CY8C36 devices use a single cycle 8051 CPU, which is fully
compatible with the original MCS-51 instruction set. The
CY8C36 family uses a pipelined RISC architecture, which
executes most instructions in 1 to 2 cycles to provide peak
performance of up to 33 MIPS with an average of 2 cycles per
instruction. The single cycle 8051 CPU runs ten times faster than
a standard 8051 processor.
The 8051 CPU subsystem includes these features:
Single cycle 8051 CPU
Up to 64 KB of flash memory, up to 2 KB of EEPROM, and up
to 8 KB of SRAM
VDDD. Supply for all digital peripherals and digital core
regulator. VDDD must be less than or equal to Vdda.
512-byte instruction cache between CPU and flash
VSSA. Ground for all analog peripherals.
Programmable nested vector interrupt controller
VSSB. Ground connection for boost pump.
VSSD. Ground for all digital logic and I/O pins.
DMA controller
Peripheral HUB (PHUB)
External memory interface (EMIF)
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 11 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
4.2 Addressing Modes
The following addressing modes are supported by the 8051:
Direct addressing: The operand is specified by a direct 8-bit
address field. Only the internal RAM and the SFRs can be
accessed using this mode.
Indirect addressing: The instruction specifies the register which
contains the address of the operand. The registers R0 or R1
are used to specify the 8-bit address, while the data pointer
(DPTR) register is used to specify the 16-bit address.
Register addressing: Certain instructions access one of the
Bit addressing: In this mode, the operand is one of 256 bits.
4.3 Instruction Set
The 8051 instruction set is highly optimized for 8-bit handling and
Boolean operations. The types of instructions supported include:
Arithmetic instructions
Logical instructions
Data transfer instructions
Boolean instructions
registers (R0 to R7) in the specified register bank. These
instructions are more efficient because there is no need for an
address field.
4.3.1 Instruction Set Summary
Register specific instructions: Some instructions are specific to
4.3.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions
certain registers. For example, some instructions always act
on the accumulator. In this case, there is no need to specify the
operand.
Immediate constants: Some instructions carry the value of the
constants directly instead of an address.
Program branching instructions
Arithmetic instructions support the direct, indirect, register,
immediate constant, and register-specific instructions.
Arithmetic modes are used for addition, subtraction,
multiplication, division, increment, and decrement operations.
Table 4-1 on page 13 lists the different arithmetic instructions.
Indexed addressing: This type of addressing can be used only
for a read of the program memory. This mode uses the Data
Pointer as the base and the accumulator value as an offset to
read a program memory.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 12 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 4-1. Arithmetic Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
Bytes
Cycles
1
1
ADD
A,Rn
Add register to accumulator
ADD
A,Direct
Add direct byte to accumulator
2
2
ADD
A,@Ri
Add indirect RAM to accumulator
1
2
ADD
A,#data
Add immediate data to accumulator
2
2
ADDC A,Rn
Add register to accumulator with carry
1
1
ADDC A,Direct
Add direct byte to accumulator with carry
2
2
ADDC A,@Ri
Add indirect RAM to accumulator with carry
1
2
ADDC A,#data
Add immediate data to accumulator with carry
2
2
SUBB A,Rn
Subtract register from accumulator with borrow
1
1
SUBB A,Direct
Subtract direct byte from accumulator with borrow
2
2
SUBB A,@Ri
Subtract indirect RAM from accumulator with borrow
1
2
SUBB A,#data
Subtract immediate data from accumulator with borrow
2
2
INC
Increment accumulator
1
1
A
INC
Rn
Increment register
1
2
INC
Direct
Increment direct byte
2
3
INC
@Ri
Increment indirect RAM
1
3
DEC
A
Decrement accumulator
1
1
DEC
Rn
Decrement register
1
2
DEC
Direct
Decrement direct byte
2
3
DEC
@Ri
Decrement indirect RAM
1
3
INC
DPTR
Increment data pointer
1
1
MUL
Multiply accumulator and B
1
2
DIV
Divide accumulator by B
1
6
DAA
Decimal adjust accumulator
1
3
4.3.1.2 Logical Instructions
The logical instructions perform Boolean operations such as AND, OR, XOR on bytes, rotate of accumulator contents, and swap of
nibbles in an accumulator. The Boolean operations on the bytes are performed on the bit-by-bit basis. Table 4-2 on page 13 shows
the list of logical instructions and their description.
Table 4-2. Logical Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
Bytes
Cycles
ANL
A,Rn
AND register to accumulator
1
1
ANL
A,Direct
AND direct byte to accumulator
2
2
ANL
A,@Ri
AND indirect RAM to accumulator
1
2
ANL
A,#data
AND immediate data to accumulator
2
2
ANL
Direct, A
AND accumulator to direct byte
2
3
ANL
Direct, #data
AND immediate data to direct byte
3
3
ORL
A,Rn
OR register to accumulator
1
1
ORL
A,Direct
OR direct byte to accumulator
2
2
ORL
A,@Ri
OR indirect RAM to accumulator
1
2
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 13 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 4-2. Logical Instructions (continued)
Bytes
Cycles
ORL
A,#data
Mnemonic
OR immediate data to accumulator
Description
2
2
ORL
Direct, A
OR accumulator to direct byte
2
3
ORL
Direct, #data
OR immediate data to direct byte
3
3
XRL
A,Rn
XOR register to accumulator
1
1
XRL
A,Direct
XOR direct byte to accumulator
2
2
XRL
A,@Ri
XOR indirect RAM to accumulator
1
2
XRL
A,#data
XOR immediate data to accumulator
2
2
XRL
Direct, A
XOR accumulator to direct byte
2
3
XRL
Direct, #data
XOR immediate data to direct byte
3
3
CLR
A
Clear accumulator
1
1
CPL
A
Complement accumulator
1
1
RL
A
Rotate accumulator left
1
1
RLC
A
Rotate accumulator left through carry
1
1
RR
A
Rotate accumulator right
1
1
RRC A
Rotate accumulator right though carry
1
1
SWAP A
Swap nibbles within accumulator
1
1
4.3.1.3 Data Transfer Instructions
4.3.1.4 Boolean Instructions
The data transfer instructions are of three types: the core RAM,
xdata RAM, and the lookup tables. The core RAM transfer
includes transfer between any two core RAM locations or SFRs.
These instructions can use direct, indirect, register, and
immediate addressing. The xdata RAM transfer includes only the
transfer between the accumulator and the xdata RAM location.
It can use only indirect addressing. The lookup tables involve
nothing but the read of program memory using the Indexed
addressing mode. Table 4-3 lists the various data transfer
instructions available.
The 8051 core has a separate bit-addressable memory location.
It has 128 bits of bit addressable RAM and a set of SFRs that are
bit addressable. The instruction set includes the whole menu of
bit operations such as move, set, clear, toggle, OR, and AND
instructions and the conditional jump instructions. Table 4-4 on
page 15 lists the available Boolean instructions.
Table 4-3. Data Transfer Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
Bytes
Cycles
MOV
A,Rn
Move register to accumulator
1
1
MOV
A,Direct
Move direct byte to accumulator
2
2
MOV
A,@Ri
Move indirect RAM to accumulator
1
2
MOV
A,#data
Move immediate data to accumulator
2
2
MOV
Rn,A
Move accumulator to register
1
1
MOV
Rn,Direct
Move direct byte to register
2
3
MOV
Rn, #data
Move immediate data to register
2
2
MOV
Direct, A
Move accumulator to direct byte
2
2
MOV
Direct, Rn
Move register to direct byte
2
2
MOV
Direct, Direct
Move direct byte to direct byte
3
3
MOV
Direct, @Ri
Move indirect RAM to direct byte
2
3
MOV
Direct, #data
Move immediate data to direct byte
3
3
MOV
@Ri, A
Move accumulator to indirect RAM
1
2
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 14 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 4-3. Data Transfer Instructions (continued)
Bytes
Cycles
MOV
@Ri, Direct
Mnemonic
Move direct byte to indirect RAM
Description
2
3
MOV
@Ri, #data
Move immediate data to indirect RAM
2
2
MOV
DPTR, #data16
Load data pointer with 16 bit constant
3
3
MOVC A, @A+DPTR
Move code byte relative to DPTR to accumulator
1
5
MOVC A, @A + PC
Move code byte relative to PC to accumulator
1
4
MOVX A,@Ri
Move external RAM (8-bit) to accumulator
1
4
MOVX A, @DPTR
Move external RAM (16-bit) to accumulator
1
3
MOVX @Ri, A
Move accumulator to external RAM (8-bit)
1
5
MOVX @DPTR, A
Move accumulator to external RAM (16-bit)
1
4
PUSH Direct
Push direct byte onto stack
2
3
POP
Pop direct byte from stack
2
2
Direct
XCH
A, Rn
Exchange register with accumulator
1
2
XCH
A, Direct
Exchange direct byte with accumulator
2
3
XCH
A, @Ri
Exchange indirect RAM with accumulator
1
3
Exchange low order indirect digit RAM with accumulator
1
3
Bytes
Cycles
XCHD A, @Ri
Table 4-4. Boolean Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
CLR
C
Clear carry
1
1
CLR
bit
Clear direct bit
2
3
SETB C
Set carry
1
1
SETB bit
Set direct bit
2
3
CPL
C
Complement carry
1
1
CPL
bit
Complement direct bit
2
3
ANL
C, bit
AND direct bit to carry
2
2
ANL
C, /bit
AND complement of direct bit to carry
2
2
ORL C, bit
OR direct bit to carry
2
2
ORL C, /bit
OR complement of direct bit to carry
2
2
MOV C, bit
Move direct bit to carry
2
2
MOV bit, C
Move carry to direct bit
2
3
JC
Jump if carry is set
2
3
JNC rel
rel
Jump if no carry is set
2
3
JB
Jump if direct bit is set
3
5
JNB bit, rel
Jump if direct bit is not set
3
5
JBC bit, rel
Jump if direct bit is set and clear bit
3
5
bit, rel
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 15 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
4.3.1.5 Program Branching Instructions
The 8051 supports a set of conditional and unconditional jump instructions that help to modify the program execution flow. Table 4-5
shows the list of jump instructions.
Table 4-5. Jump Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
Bytes
Cycles
ACALL addr11
Absolute subroutine call
2
4
LCALL addr16
Long subroutine call
3
4
RET
Return from subroutine
1
4
RETI
Return from interrupt
1
4
AJMP addr11
Absolute jump
2
3
LJMP addr16
Long jump
3
4
SJMP rel
Short jump (relative address)
2
3
JMP @A + DPTR
Jump indirect relative to DPTR
1
5
JZ rel
Jump if accumulator is zero
2
4
JNZ rel
Jump if accumulator is nonzero
2
4
CJNE A,Direct, rel
Compare direct byte to accumulator and jump if not equal
3
5
CJNE A, #data, rel
Compare immediate data to accumulator and jump if not equal
3
4
CJNE Rn, #data, rel
Compare immediate data to register and jump if not equal
3
4
CJNE @Ri, #data, rel
Compare immediate data to indirect RAM and jump if not equal
3
5
DJNZ Rn,rel
Decrement register and jump if not zero
2
4
DJNZ Direct, rel
Decrement direct byte and jump if not zero
3
5
NOP
No operation
1
1
4.4 DMA and PHUB
The PHUB and the DMA controller are responsible for data
transfer between the CPU and peripherals, and also data
transfers between peripherals. The PHUB and DMA also control
device configuration during boot. The PHUB consists of:
A central hub that includes the DMA controller, arbiter, and
router
Multiple spokes that radiate outward from the hub to most
peripherals
There are two PHUB masters: the CPU and the DMA controller.
Both masters may initiate transactions on the bus. The DMA
channels can handle peripheral communication without CPU
intervention. The arbiter in the central hub determines which
DMA channel is the highest priority if there are multiple requests.
4.4.1 PHUB Features
CPU and DMA controller are both bus masters to the PHUB
Eight Multi-layer AHB Bus parallel access paths (spokes) for
peripheral access
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Simultaneous CPU and DMA access to peripherals located on
different spokes
Simultaneous DMA source and destination burst transactions
on different spokes
Supports 8-, 16-, 24-, and 32-bit addressing and data
Table 4-6. PHUB Spokes and Peripherals
PHUB Spokes
Peripherals
0
SRAM
1
IOs, PICU, EMIF
2
PHUB local configuration, Power manager,
Clocks, IC, SWV, EEPROM, Flash
programming interface
3
Analog interface and trim, Decimator
4
USB, CAN, I2C, Timers, Counters, and PWMs
5
DFB
6
UDBs group 1
7
UDBs group 2
Page 16 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
4.4.2 DMA Features
Table 4-7. Priority Levels
24 DMA channels
Each channel has one or more transaction descriptors (TD) to
configure channel behavior. Up to 128 total TDs can be defined
TDs can be dynamically updated
Eight levels of priority per channel
Any digitally routable signal, the CPU, or another DMA channel,
can trigger a transaction
Each channel can generate up to two interrupts per transfer
Transactions can be stalled or canceled
Supports transaction size of infinite or 1 to 64 KB
TDs may be nested and/or chained for complex transactions
4.4.3 Priority Levels
The CPU always has higher priority than the DMA controller
when their accesses require the same bus resources. Due to the
system architecture, the CPU can never starve the DMA. DMA
channels of higher priority (lower priority number) may interrupt
current DMA transfers. In the case of an interrupt, the current
transfer is allowed to complete its current transaction. To ensure
latency limits when multiple DMA accesses are requested
simultaneously, a fairness algorithm guarantees an interleaved
minimum percentage of bus bandwidth for priority levels 2
through 7. Priority levels 0 and 1 do not take part in the fairness
algorithm and may use 100% of the bus bandwidth. If a tie occurs
on two DMA requests of the same priority level, a simple round
robin method is used to evenly share the allocated bandwidth.
The round robin allocation can be disabled for each DMA
channel, allowing it to always be at the head of the line. Priority
levels 2 to 7 are guaranteed the minimum bus bandwidth shown
in Table 4-7 after the CPU and DMA priority levels 0 and 1 have
satisfied their requirements.
Priority Level
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
% Bus Bandwidth
100.0
100.0
50.0
25.0
12.5
6.2
3.1
1.5
When the fairness algorithm is disabled, DMA access is granted
based solely on the priority level; no bus bandwidth guarantees
are made.
4.4.4 Transaction Modes Supported
The flexible configuration of each DMA channel and the ability to
chain multiple channels allow the creation of both simple and
complex use cases. General use cases include, but are not
limited to:
4.4.4.1 Simple DMA
In a simple DMA case, a single TD transfers data between a
source and sink (peripherals or memory location). The basic
timing diagrams of DMA read and write cycles shown in
Figure 4-1. For more description on other transfer modes, refer
to the Technical Reference Manual.
Figure 4-1. DMA Timing Diagram
ADDRESS Phase
DATA Phase
ADDRESS Phase
CLK
ADDR 16/32
DATA Phase
CLK
A
ADDR 16/32
B
WRITE
A
B
WRITE
DATA (A)
DATA
READY
DATA (A)
DATA
READY
Basic DMA Read Transfer without wait states
4.4.4.2 Auto Repeat DMA
Auto repeat DMA is typically used when a static pattern is
repetitively read from system memory and written to a peripheral.
This is done with a single TD that chains to itself.
4.4.4.3 Ping Pong DMA
A ping pong DMA case uses double buffering to allow one buffer
to be filled by one client while another client is consuming the
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Basic DMA Write Transfer without wait states
data previously received in the other buffer. In its simplest form,
this is done by chaining two TDs together so that each TD calls
the opposite TD when complete.
4.4.4.4 Circular DMA
Circular DMA is similar to ping pong DMA except it contains more
than two buffers. In this case there are multiple TDs; after the last
TD is complete it chains back to the first TD.
Page 17 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
4.4.4.5 Scatter Gather DMA
4.5 Interrupt Controller
In the case of scatter gather DMA, there are multiple
noncontiguous sources or destinations that are required to
effectively carry out an overall DMA transaction. For example, a
packet may need to be transmitted off of the device and the
packet elements, including the header, payload, and trailer, exist
in various noncontiguous locations in memory. Scatter gather
DMA allows the segments to be concatenated together by using
multiple TDs in a chain. The chain gathers the data from the
multiple locations. A similar concept applies for the reception of
data onto the device. Certain parts of the received data may need
to be scattered to various locations in memory for software
processing convenience. Each TD in the chain specifies the
location for each discrete element in the chain.
The interrupt controller provides a mechanism for hardware
resources to change program execution to a new address,
independent of the current task being executed by the main
code. The interrupt controller provides enhanced features not
found on original 8051 interrupt controllers:
4.4.4.6 Packet Queuing DMA
Packet queuing DMA is similar to scatter gather DMA but
specifically refers to packet protocols. With these protocols,
there may be separate configuration, data, and status phases
associated with sending or receiving a packet.
For instance, to transmit a packet, a memory mapped
configuration register can be written inside a peripheral,
specifying the overall length of the ensuing data phase. The CPU
can set up this configuration information anywhere in system
memory and copy it with a simple TD to the peripheral. After the
configuration phase, a data phase TD (or a series of data phase
TDs) can begin (potentially using scatter gather). When the data
phase TD(s) finish, a status phase TD can be invoked that reads
some memory mapped status information from the peripheral
and copies it to a location in system memory specified by the
CPU for later inspection. Multiple sets of configuration, data, and
status phase “subchains” can be strung together to create larger
chains that transmit multiple packets in this way. A similar
concept exists in the opposite direction to receive the packets.
4.4.4.7 Nested DMA
One TD may modify another TD, as the TD configuration space
is memory mapped similar to any other peripheral. For example,
a first TD loads a second TD’s configuration and then calls the
second TD. The second TD moves data as required by the
application. When complete, the second TD calls the first TD,
which again updates the second TD’s configuration. This
process repeats as often as necessary.
Thirty-two interrupt vectors
Jumps directly to ISR anywhere in code space with dynamic
vector addresses
Multiple sources for each vector
Flexible interrupt to vector matching
Each interrupt vector is independently enabled or disabled
Each interrupt can be dynamically assigned one of eight
priorities
Eight level nestable interrupts
Multiple I/O interrupt vectors
Software can send interrupts
Software can clear pending interrupts
When an interrupt is pending, the current instruction is
completed and the program counter is pushed onto the stack.
Code execution then jumps to the program address provided by
the vector. After the ISR is completed, a RETI instruction is
executed and returns execution to the instruction following the
previously interrupted instruction. To do this the RETI instruction
pops the program counter from the stack.
If the same priority level is assigned to two or more interrupts,
the interrupt with the lower vector number is executed first. Each
interrupt vector may choose from three interrupt sources: Fixed
Function, DMA, and UDB. The fixed function interrupts are direct
connections to the most common interrupt sources and provide
the lowest resource cost connection. The DMA interrupt sources
provide direct connections to the two DMA interrupt sources
provided per DMA channel. The third interrupt source for vectors
is from the UDB digital routing array. This allows any digital signal
available to the UDB array to be used as an interrupt source.
Fixed function interrupts and all interrupt sources may be routed
to any interrupt vector using the UDB interrupt source
connections.
Figure 4-2 on page 19 represents typical flow of events when an
interrupt triggered. Figure 4-3 on page 20 shows the interrupt
structure and priority polling.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 18 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 4-2. Interrupt Processing Timing Diagram
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
S
CLK
Arrival of new Interrupt
INT_INPUT
S
Pend bit is set on next clock active edge
POST and PEND bits cleared after IRQ is sleared
PEND
S
Interrupt is posted to ascertain the priority
POST
S
Interrupt request sent to core for processing
IRQ
ACTIVE_INT_NUM
(#10)
NA
NA
INT_VECT_ADDR
0x0010
IRQ cleared after receiving IRA
S
S
The active interrupt
number is posted to core
The active interrupt ISR
address is posted to core
0x0000
S
S
NA
S
IRA
S
IRC
Interrupt generation and posting to CPU
CPU Response
Int. State
Clear
S
Completing current instruction and branching to vector address
Complete ISR and return
TIME
Notes
1: Interrupt triggered asynchronous to the clock
2: The PEND bit is set on next active clock edge to indicate the interrupt arrival
3: POST bit is set following the PEND bit
4: Interrupt request and the interrupt number sent to CPU core after evaluation priority (Takes 3 clocks)
5: ISR address is posted to CPU core for branching
6: CPU acknowledges the interrupt request
7: ISR address is read by CPU for branching
8, 9: PEND and POST bits are cleared respectively after receiving the IRA from core
10: IRA bit is cleared after completing the current instruction and starting the instruction execution from ISR location (Takes 7 cycles)
11: IRC is set to indicate the completion of ISR, Active int. status is restored with previous status
The total interrupt latency (ISR execution)
= POST + PEND + IRQ + IRA + Completing current instruction and branching
= 1+1+1+2+7 cycles
= 12 cycles
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 19 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 4-3. Interrupt Structure
Interrupt Polling logic
Interrupts form Fixed
function blocks, DMA and
UDBs
Highest Priority
Interrupt Enable/
Disable, PEND and
POST logic
Interrupts 0 to 31
from UDBs
0
Interrupts 0 to 31
from Fixed
Function Blocks
1
IRQ
8 Level
Priority
decoder
for all
interrupts
Polling sequence
Interrupt
routing logic
to select 32
sources
Interrupt 2 to 30
Interrupts 0 to
31 from DMA
Individual
Enable Disable
bits
0 to 31
ACTIVE_INT_NUM
[15:0]
INT_VECT_ADDR
IRA
IRC
31
Global Enable
disable bit
Lowest Priority
Table 4-8. Interrupt Vector Table
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Fixed Function
LVD
Cache/ECC
Reserved
Sleep (Pwr Mgr)
PICU[0]
PICU[1]
PICU[2]
PICU[3]
PICU[4]
PICU[5]
PICU[6]
PICU[12]
PICU[15]
Comparators Combined
Switched Caps Combined
I2C
CAN
Timer/Counter0
Timer/Counter1
Timer/Counter2
Timer/Counter3
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
DMA
phub_termout0[0]
phub_termout0[1]
phub_termout0[2]
phub_termout0[3]
phub_termout0[4]
phub_termout0[5]
phub_termout0[6]
phub_termout0[7]
phub_termout0[8]
phub_termout0[9]
phub_termout0[10]
phub_termout0[11]
phub_termout0[12]
phub_termout0[13]
phub_termout0[14]
phub_termout0[15]
phub_termout1[0]
phub_termout1[1]
phub_termout1[2]
phub_termout1[3]
phub_termout1[4]
UDB
udb_intr[0]
udb_intr[1]
udb_intr[2]
udb_intr[3]
udb_intr[4]
udb_intr[5]
udb_intr[6]
udb_intr[7]
udb_intr[8]
udb_intr[9]
udb_intr[10]
udb_intr[11]
udb_intr[12]
udb_intr[13]
udb_intr[14]
udb_intr[15]
udb_intr[16]
udb_intr[17]
udb_intr[18]
udb_intr[19]
udb_intr[20]
Page 20 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 4-8. Interrupt Vector Table (continued)
#
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Fixed Function
USB SOF Int
USB Arb Int
USB Bus Int
USB Endpoint[0]
USB Endpoint Data
Reserved
LCD
DFB Int
Decimator Int
PHUB Error Int
EEPROM Fault Int
DMA
phub_termout1[5]
phub_termout1[6]
phub_termout1[7]
phub_termout1[8]
phub_termout1[9]
phub_termout1[10]
phub_termout1[11]
phub_termout1[12]
phub_termout1[13]
phub_termout1[14]
phub_termout1[15]
5. Memory
5.1 Static RAM
CY8C36 Static RAM (SRAM) is used for temporary data storage.
Up to 8 KB of SRAM is provided and can be accessed by the
8051 or the DMA controller. See Memory Map on page 23.
Simultaneous access of SRAM by the 8051 and the DMA
controller is possible if different 4-KB blocks are accessed.
5.2 Flash Program Memory
Flash memory in PSoC devices provides nonvolatile storage for
user firmware, user configuration data, bulk data storage, and
optional ECC data. The main flash memory area contains up to
64 KB of user program space.
Up to an additional 8 KB of flash space is available for ECC. If
ECC is not used this space can store device configuration data
and bulk user data. User code may not be run out of the ECC
flash memory section. ECC can correct one bit error and detect
two bit errors per 8 bytes of firmware memory; an interrupt can
be generated when an error is detected.
The CPU reads instructions located in flash through a cache
controller. This improves instruction execution rate and reduces
system power consumption by requiring less frequent flash
access. The cache has 8 lines at 64 bytes per line for a total of
512 bytes. It is fully associative, automatically controls flash
power, and can be enabled or disabled. If ECC is enabled, the
cache controller also performs error checking and correction,
and interrupt generation.
Flash programming is performed through a special interface and
preempts code execution out of flash. The flash programming
interface performs flash erasing, programming and setting code
protection levels. Flash in-system serial programming (ISSP),
typically used for production programming, is possible through
both the SWD and JTAG interfaces. In-system programming,
typically used for bootloaders, is also possible using serial
interfaces such as I2C, USB, UART, and SPI, or any
communications protocol.
5.3 Flash Security
All PSoC devices include a flexible flash-protection model that
prevents access and visibility to on-chip flash memory. This
prevents duplication or reverse engineering of proprietary code.
Flash memory is organized in blocks, where each block contains
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
UDB
udb_intr[21]
udb_intr[22]
udb_intr[23]
udb_intr[24]
udb_intr[25]
udb_intr[26]
udb_intr[27]
udb_intr[28]
udb_intr[29]
udb_intr[30]
udb_intr[31]
256 bytes of program or data and 32 bytes of ECC or
configuration data. A total of up to 256 blocks is provided on
64-KB flash devices.
The device offers the ability to assign one of four protection
levels to each row of flash. Table 5-1 lists the protection modes
available. Flash protection levels can only be changed by
performing a complete flash erase. The Full Protection and Field
Upgrade settings disable external access (through a debugging
tool such as PSoC Creator, for example). If your application
requires code update through a boot loader, then use the Field
Upgrade setting. Use the Unprotected setting only when no
security is needed in your application. The PSoC device also
offers an advanced security feature called Device Security that
permanently disables all test, programming, and debug ports,
protecting your application from external access (see Device
Security on page 65). For information about how to take full
advantage of the security features in PSoC, see the PSoC 3
TRM.
Table 5-1. Flash Protection
Protection
Setting
Allowed
Not Allowed
Unprotected
External read and write –
+ internal read and write
Factory
Upgrade
External write + internal
read and write
External read
Field Upgrade Internal read and write
External read and
write
Full Protection Internal read
External read and
write + internal write
Disclaimer
Note the following details of the flash code protection features on
Cypress devices.
Cypress products meet the specifications contained in their
particular Cypress data sheets. Cypress believes that its family
of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the
market today, regardless of how they are used. There may be
methods, unknown to Cypress, that can breach the code
protection features. Any of these methods, to our knowledge,
would be dishonest and possibly illegal. Neither Cypress nor any
other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of
their code. Code protection does not mean that we are
guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.”
Page 21 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Cypress is willing to work with the customer who is concerned
about the integrity of their code. Code protection is constantly
evolving. We at Cypress are committed to continuously
improving the code protection features of our products.
5.4 EEPROM
PSoC EEPROM memory is a byte-addressable nonvolatile memory. The CY8C36 has up to 2 KB of EEPROM memory to store user
data. Reads from EEPROM are random access at the byte level. Reads are done directly; writes are done by sending write commands
to an EEPROM programming interface. CPU code execution can continue from flash during EEPROM writes. EEPROM is erasable
and writeable at the row level. The EEPROM is divided into 128 rows of 16 bytes each.
The CPU can not execute out of EEPROM. There is no ECC hardware associated with EEPROM. If ECC is required it must be handled
in firmware.
5.5 Nonvolatile Latches (NVLs)
PSoC has a 4-byte array of nonvolatile latches (NVLs) that are used to configure the device at reset. The NVL register map is shown
in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2. Device Configuration NVL Register Map
Register Address
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x00
PRT3RDM[1:0]
PRT2RDM[1:0]
PRT1RDM[1:0]
PRT0RDM[1:0]
0x01
PRT12RDM[1:0]
PRT6RDM[1:0]
PRT5RDM[1:0]
PRT4RDM[1:0]
0x02
XRESMEN
0x03
PRT15RDM[1:0]
DIG_PHS_DLY[3:0]
ECCEN
DPS[1:0]
CFGSPEED
The details for individual fields and their factory default settings are shown in Table 5-3:.
Table 5-3. Fields and Factory Default Settings
Field
Description
Settings
PRTxRDM[1:0]
Controls reset drive mode of the corresponding IO port. 00b (default) - high impedance analog
See “Reset Configuration” on page 40. All pins of the port 01b - high impedance digital
10b - resistive pull up
are set to the same mode.
11b - resistive pull down
XRESMEN
Controls whether pin P1[2] is used as a GPIO or as an
0 (default for 68-pin and 100-pin parts) - GPIO
external reset. See “Pin Descriptions” on page 10, XRES 1 (default for 48-pin parts) - external reset
description.
CFGSPEED
Controls the speed of the IMO-based clock during the
device boot process, for faster boot or low-power
operation
0 (default) - 12 MHz IMO
1 - 48 MHz IMO
DPS{1:0]
Controls the usage of various P1 pins as a debug port.
See “Programming, Debug Interfaces, Resources” on
page 62.
00b - 5-wire JTAG
01b (default) - 4-wire JTAG
10b - SWD
11b - debug ports disabled
ECCEN
Controls whether ECC flash is used for ECC or for general 0 (default) - ECC disabled
1 - ECC enabled
configuration and data storage. See “Flash Program
Memory” on page 21.
DIG_PHS_DLY[3:0]
Selects the digital clock phase delay.
See the TRM for details.
Although PSoC Creator provides support for modifying the device configuration NVLs, the number of NVL erase / write cycles is limited
– see “Nonvolatile Latches (NVL))” on page 104.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 22 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
5.6 External Memory Interface
CY8C36 provides an external memory interface (EMIF) for
connecting to external memory devices. The connection allows
read and write accesses to external memories. The EMIF
operates in conjunction with UDBs, I/O ports, and other
hardware to generate external memory address and control
signals. At 33 MHz, each memory access cycle takes four bus
clock cycles.
Figure 5-1 is the EMIF block diagram. The EMIF supports
synchronous and asynchronous memories. The CY8C36
supports only one type of external memory device at a time.
External memory can be accessed through the 8051 xdata
space; up to 24 address bits can be used. See xdata Space on
page 25. The memory can be 8 or 16 bits wide.
Figure 5-1. EMIF Block Diagram
Address Signals
External_ MEM_ ADDR[23:0]
IO
PORTs
Data Signals
External_ MEM_ DATA[15:0]
IO
PORTs
Control Signals
IO
PORTs
Data,
Address,
and Control
Signals
IO IF
PHUB
Data,
Address,
and Control
Signals
Control
DSI Dynamic Output
Control
UDB
DSI to Port
Data,
Address,
and Control
Signals
EM Control
Signals
Other
Control
Signals
EMIF
5.7 Memory Map
5.7.2 Internal Data Space
The CY8C36 8051 memory map is very similar to the MCS-51
memory map.
The CY8C36 8051 internal data space is 384 bytes, compressed
within a 256-byte space. This space consists of 256 bytes of
RAM (in addition to the SRAM mentioned in “Static RAM” on
page 21) and a 128-byte space for Special Function Registers
(SFRs). See Figure 5-2. The lowest 32 bytes are used for four
banks of registers R0-R7. The next 16 bytes are bit-addressable.
5.7.1 Code Space
The CY8C36 8051 code space is 64 KB. Only main flash exists
in this space. See the “Flash Program Memory” section on
page 21.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 23 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 5-2. 8051 Internal Data Space
0x00
In addition to the register or bit address modes used with the
lower 48 bytes, the lower 128 bytes can be accessed with direct
or indirect addressing. With direct addressing mode, the upper
128 bytes map to the SFRs. With indirect addressing mode, the
upper 128 bytes map to RAM. Stack operations use indirect
addressing; the 8051 stack space is 256 bytes. See the
“Addressing Modes” section on page 12.
4 Banks, R0-R7 Each
0x1F
0x20
Bit-Addressable Area
0x2F
0x30
Lower Core RAM Shared with Stack Space
(direct and indirect addressing)
0x7F
0x80
Upper Core RAM Shared
with Stack Space
(indirect addressing)
0xFF
SFR
Special Function Registers
(direct addressing)
5.7.3 SFRs
The special function register (SFR) space provides access to frequently accessed registers. The memory map for the SFR memory
space is shown in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4. SFR Map
Address
0/8
1/9
2/A
3/B
4/C
5/D
6/E
7/F
0×F8
SFRPRT15DR
SFRPRT15PS
SFRPRT15SEL
–
–
–
–
–
0×F0
B
–
SFRPRT12SEL
–
–
–
–
–
0×E8
SFRPRT12DR
SFRPRT12PS
MXAX
–
–
–
–
–
0×E0
ACC
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0×D8
SFRPRT6DR
SFRPRT6PS
SFRPRT6SEL
–
–
–
–
–
0×D0
PSW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0×C8
SFRPRT5DR
SFRPRT5PS
SFRPRT5SEL
–
–
–
–
–
0×C0
SFRPRT4DR
SFRPRT4PS
SFRPRT4SEL
–
–
–
–
–
0×B8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0×B0
SFRPRT3DR
SFRPRT3PS
SFRPRT3SEL
–
–
–
–
–
0×A8
IE
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0×A0
P2AX
–
SFRPRT1SEL
–
–
–
–
–
0×98
SFRPRT2DR
SFRPRT2PS
SFRPRT2SEL
–
–
–
–
–
0×90
SFRPRT1DR
SFRPRT1PS
–
DPX0
–
DPX1
–
–
0×88
–
SFRPRT0PS
SFRPRT0SEL
–
–
–
–
–
0×80
SFRPRT0DR
SP
DPL0
DPH0
DPL1
DPH1
DPS
–
The CY8C36 family provides the standard set of registers found
on industry standard 8051 devices. In addition, the CY8C36
devices add SFRs to provide direct access to the I/O ports on the
device. The following sections describe the SFRs added to the
CY8C36 family.
5.7.4 XData Space Access SFRs
The 8051 core features dual DPTR registers for faster data
transfer operations. The data pointer select SFR, DPS, selects
which data pointer register, DPTR0 or DPTR1, is used for the
following instructions:
MOVX @DPTR, A
MOVX A, @DPTR
MOVC A, @A+DPTR
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
JMP @A+DPTR
INC DPTR
MOV DPTR, #data16
The extended data pointer SFRs, DPX0, DPX1, MXAX, and
P2AX, hold the most significant parts of memory addresses
during access to the xdata space. These SFRs are used only
with the MOVX instructions.
During a MOVX instruction using the DPTR0/DPTR1 register,
the most significant byte of the address is always equal to the
contents of DPX0/DPX1.
During a MOVX instruction using the R0 or R1 register, the most
significant byte of the address is always equal to the contents of
MXAX, and the next most significant byte is always equal to the
contents of P2AX.
Page 24 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
5.7.5 I/O Port SFRs
The I/O ports provide digital input sensing, output drive, pin
interrupts, connectivity for analog inputs and outputs, LCD, and
access to peripherals through the DSI. Full information on I/O
ports is found in I/O System and Routing on page 34.
Table 5-5. XDATA Data Address Map
Address Range
Purpose
0×00 0000 – 0×00 1FFF
SRAM
0×00 4000 – 0×00 42FF
Clocking, PLLs, and oscillators
I/O ports are linked to the CPU through the PHUB and are also
available in the SFRs. Using the SFRs allows faster access to a
limited set of I/O port registers, while using the PHUB allows boot
configuration and access to all I/O port registers.
0×00 4300 – 0×00 43FF
Power management
0×00 4400 – 0×00 44FF
Interrupt controller
0×00 4500 – 0×00 45FF
Ports interrupt control
Each SFR supported I/O port provides three SFRs:
0×00 4700 – 0×00 47FF
Flash programming interface
SFRPRTxDR sets the output data state of the port (where × is
port number and includes ports 0–6, 12 and 15).
0×00 4800 - 0×00 48FF
Cache controller
0×00 4900 – 0×00 49FF
I2C controller
0×00 4E00 – 0×00 4EFF
Decimator
register or the SFRPRTxDR controls each pin’s output buffer
within the port. If a SFRPRTxSEL[y] bit is high, the
corresponding SFRPRTxDR[y] bit sets the output state for that
pin. If a SFRPRTxSEL[y] bit is low, the corresponding
PRTxDR[y] bit sets the output state of the pin (where y varies
from 0 to 7).
0×00 4F00 – 0×00 4FFF
Fixed timer/counter/PWMs
0×00 5000 – 0×00 51FF
I/O ports control
0×00 5400 – 0×00 54FF
External Memory Interface
(EMIF) control registers
0×00 5800 – 0×00 5FFF
Analog Subsystem interface
The SFRPRTxPS is a read only register that contains pin state
0×00 6000 – 0×00 60FF
USB controller
0×00 6400 – 0×00 6FFF
UDB configuration
The SFRPRTxSEL selects whether the PHUB PRTxDR
values of the port pins.
5.7.5.1 xdata Space
The 8051 xdata space is 24-bit, or 16 MB in size. The majority of
this space is not “external”—it is used by on-chip components.
See Table 5-5. External, that is, off-chip, memory can be
accessed using the EMIF. See External Memory Interface on
page 23.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
0×00 7000 – 0×00 7FFF
PHUB configuration
0×00 8000 – 0×00 8FFF
EEPROM
0×00 A000 – 0×00 A400
CAN
0×00 C000 – 0×00 C800
Digital Filter Block
0×01 0000 – 0×01 FFFF
Digital Interconnect
configuration
0×05 0220 – 0×05 02F0
Debug controller
0×08 0000 – 0×08 1FFF
flash ECC bytes
0×80 0000 – 0×FF FFFF
External Memory Interface
Page 25 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
6. System Integration
6.1 Clocking System
The clocking system generates, divides, and distributes clocks
throughout the PSoC system. For the majority of systems, no
external crystal is required. The IMO and PLL together can
generate up to a 66 MHz clock, accurate to ±1% over voltage and
temperature. Additional internal and external clock sources allow
each design to optimize accuracy, power, and cost. Any of the
clock sources can be used to generate other clock frequencies
in the 16-bit clock dividers and UDBs for anything the user wants,
for example a UART baud rate generator.
Clock generation and distribution is automatically configured
through the PSoC Creator IDE graphical interface. This is based
on the complete system’s requirements. It greatly speeds the
design process. PSoC Creator allows you to build clocking
systems with minimal input. You can specify desired clock
frequencies and accuracies, and the software locates or builds a
clock that meets the required specifications. This is possible
because of the programmability inherent in PSoC.
Key features of the clocking system include:
Seven general purpose clock sources
3- to 62-MHz IMO, ±1% at 3 MHz
4- to 25-MHz external crystal oscillator (MHzECO)
Clock doubler provides a doubled clock frequency output for
the USB block, see USB Clock Domain on page 29.
DSI signal from an external I/O pin or other logic
24- to 67-MHz fractional PLL sourced from IMO, MHzECO,
or DSI
1-kHz, 33-kHz, 100-kHz ILO for WDT and sleep timer
32.768-kHz external crystal oscillator (kHzECO) for RTC
IMO has a USB mode that auto locks to the USB bus clock
requiring no external crystal for USB. (USB equipped parts only)
Independently sourced clock in all clock dividers
Eight 16-bit clock dividers for the digital system
Four 16-bit clock dividers for the analog system
Dedicated 16-bit divider for the bus clock
Dedicated 4-bit divider for the CPU clock
Automatic clock configuration in PSoC Creator
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 26 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 6-1. Clocking Subsystem
3-62 MHz
IMO
4-25 MHz
ECO
External IO
or DSI
0-66 MHz
32 kHz ECO
1,33,100 kHz
ILO
CPU
Clock
CPU Clock Divider
4 bit
48 MHz
Doubler for
USB
24-67 MHz
PLL
Master
Mux
Bus
Clock
Bus Clock Divider
16 bit
Digital Clock
Divider 16 bit
Digital Clock
Divider 16 bit
Analog Clock
Divider 16 bit
s
k
e
w
Digital Clock
Divider 16 bit
Digital Clock
Divider 16 bit
Analog Clock
Divider 16 bit
s
k
e
w
7
7
Digital Clock
Divider 16 bit
Digital Clock
Divider 16 bit
Analog Clock
Divider 16 bit
s
k
e
w
Digital Clock
Divider 16 bit
Digital Clock
Divider 16 bit
Analog Clock
Divider 16 bit
s
k
e
w
Table 6-1. Oscillator Summary
Source
IMO
MHzECO
Fmin
3 MHz
4 MHz
Tolerance at Fmin
±1% over voltage and temperature
Crystal dependent
Fmax
62 MHz
25 MHz
Tolerance at Fmax
±7%
Crystal dependent
DSI
PLL
Doubler
ILO
0 MHz
24 MHz
48 MHz
1 kHz
Input dependent
Input dependent
Input dependent
–50%, +100%
66 MHz
67 MHz
48 MHz
100 kHz
Input dependent
Input dependent
Input dependent
–55%, +100%
kHzECO
32 kHz
Crystal dependent
32 kHz
Crystal dependent
Startup Time
13 µs max
5 ms typ, max is
crystal dependent
Input dependent
250 µs max
1 µs max
15 ms max in lowest
power mode
500 ms typ, max is
crystal dependent
6.1.1 Internal Oscillators
6.1.1.2 Clock Doubler
6.1.1.1 Internal Main Oscillator
The clock doubler outputs a clock at twice the frequency of the
input clock. The doubler worksat input frequency of 24 MHz,
providing 48 MHz for the USB. It can be configured to use a clock
from the IMO, MHzECO, or the DSI (external pin).
In most designs the IMO is the only clock source required, due
to its ±1% accuracy. The IMO operates with no external
components and outputs a stable clock. A factory trim for each
frequency range is stored in the device. With the factory trim,
tolerance varies from ±1% at 3 MHz, up to ±7% at 62 MHz. The
IMO, in conjunction with the PLL, allows generation of other
clocks up to the device's maximum frequency (see
Phase-Locked Loop).
The IMO provides clock outputs at 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, and 62 MHz.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
6.1.1.3 Phase-Locked Loop
The PLL allows low frequency, high accuracy clocks to be
multiplied to higher frequencies. This is a tradeoff between
higher clock frequency and accuracy and, higher power
consumption and increased startup time.
Page 27 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
The PLL block provides a mechanism for generating clock
frequencies based upon a variety of input sources. The PLL
outputs clock frequencies in the range of 24 to 67 MHz. Its input
and feedback dividers supply 4032 discrete ratios to create
almost any desired clock frequency. The accuracy of the PLL
output depends on the accuracy of the PLL input source. The
most common PLL use is to multiply the IMO clock at 3 MHz,
where it is most accurate, to generate the other clocks up to the
device’s maximum frequency.
The PLL achieves phase lock within 250 µs (verified by bit
setting). It can be configured to use a clock from the IMO,
MHzECO or DSI (external pin). The PLL clock source can be
used until lock is complete and signaled with a lock bit. The lock
signal can be routed through the DSI to generate an interrupt.
Disable the PLL before entering low-power modes.
Figure 6-2. MHzECO Block Diagram
Xi
(Pin P15[1])
External
Components
6.1.1.4 Internal Low-Speed Oscillator
The ILO provides clock frequencies for low-power consumption,
including the watchdog timer, and sleep timer. The ILO
generates up to three different clocks: 1 kHz, 33 kHz, and
100 kHz.
The 1-kHz clock (CLK1K) is typically used for a background
‘heartbeat’ timer. This clock inherently lends itself to low-power
supervisory operations such as the watchdog timer and long
sleep intervals using the central timewheel (CTW).
The central timewheel is a 1-kHz, free-running, 13-bit counter
clocked by the ILO. The central timewheel is always enabled,
except in hibernate mode and when the CPU is stopped during
debug on chip mode. It can be used to generate periodic
interrupts for timing purposes or to wake the system from a
low-power mode. Firmware can reset the central timewheel.
Systems that require accurate timing should use the RTC
capability instead of the central timewheel.
The 33-kHz clock (CLK33K) comes from a divide-by-3 operation
on CLK100K. This output can be used as a reduced accuracy
version of the 32.768-kHz ECO clock with no need for a crystal.
6.1.2 External Oscillators
Xo
(Pin P15[0])
4 – 25 MHz
crystal
Capacitors
6.1.2.2 32.768-kHz ECO
The 32.768-kHz external crystal oscillator (32kHzECO) provides
precision timing with minimal power consumption using an
external 32.768-kHz watch crystal (see Figure 6-3). The
32kHzECO also connects directly to the sleep timer and provides
the source for the RTC. The RTC uses a 1-second interrupt to
implement the RTC functionality in firmware.
The oscillator works in two distinct power modes. This allows
users to trade off power consumption with noise immunity from
neighboring circuits. The GPIO pins connected to the external
crystal and capacitors are fixed.
Figure 6-3. 32kHzECO Block Diagram
The 100-kHz clock (CLK100K) can be used as a low power
master clock. It can also generate time intervals using the fast
timewheel.
The fast timewheel is a 5-bit counter, clocked by the 100-kHz
clock. It features programmable settings and automatically
resets when the terminal count is reached. An optional interrupt
can be generated each time the terminal count is reached. This
enables flexible, periodic interrupts of the CPU at a higher rate
than is allowed using the central timewheel.
XCLK_MHZ
4 – 25 MHz
Crystal Osc
32 kHz
Crystal Osc
Xi
(Pin P15[3])
External
Components
XCLK32K
Xo
(Pin P15[2])
32 kHz
crystal
Capacitors
6.1.2.1 MHz External Crystal Oscillator
The MHzECO provides high frequency, high precision clocking
using an external crystal (see Figure 6-2). It supports a wide
variety of crystal types, in the range of 4 to 25 MHz. When used
in conjunction with the PLL, it can generate other clocks up to the
device's maximum frequency (see Phase-Locked Loop). The
GPIO pins connecting to the external crystal and capacitors are
fixed. MHzECO accuracy depends on the crystal chosen.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
It is recommended that the external 32.768-kHz watch crystal
have a load capacitance (CL) of 6 pF or 12.5 pF. Check the
crystal manufacturer's datasheet. The two external capacitors,
CL1 and CL2, are typically of the same value, and their total
capacitance, CL1CL2 / (CL1 + CL2), including pin and trace
capacitance, should equal the crystal CL value. For more
information, refer to application note AN54439: PSoC 3 and
PSoC 5 External Oscillators. See also pin capacitance
specifications in the “GPIO” section on page 75.
Page 28 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
6.1.2.3 Digital System Interconnect
The DSI provides routing for clocks taken from external clock
oscillators connected to I/O. The oscillators can also be
generated within the device in the digital system and UDBs.
While the primary DSI clock input provides access to all clocking
resources, up to eight other DSI clocks (internally or externally
generated) may be routed directly to the eight digital clock
dividers. This is only possible if there are multiple precision clock
sources.
6.1.3 Clock Distribution
All seven clock sources are inputs to the central clock distribution
system. The distribution system is designed to create multiple
high precision clocks. These clocks are customized for the
design’s requirements and eliminate the common problems
found with limited resolution prescalers attached to peripherals.
The clock distribution system generates several types of clock
trees.
The master clock is used to select and supply the fastest clock
in the system for general clock requirements and clock
synchronization of the PSoC device.
Bus clock 16-bit divider uses the master clock to generate the
bus clock used for data transfers. Bus clock is the source clock
for the CPU clock divider.
Eight fully programmable 16-bit clock dividers generate digital
system clocks for general use in the digital system, as
configured by the design’s requirements. Digital system clocks
can generate custom clocks derived from any of the seven
clock sources for any purpose. Examples include baud rate
generators, accurate PWM periods, and timer clocks, and
many others. If more than eight digital clock dividers are
required, the Universal Digital Blocks (UDBs) and fixed function
timer/counter/PWMs can also generate clocks.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Four 16-bit clock dividers generate clocks for the analog system
components that require clocking, such as ADC and mixers.
The analog clock dividers include skew control to ensure that
critical analog events do not occur simultaneously with digital
switching events. This is done to reduce analog system noise.
Each clock divider consists of an 8-input multiplexer, a 16-bit
clock divider (divide by 2 and higher) that generates ~50% duty
cycle clocks, master clock resynchronization logic, and deglitch
logic. The outputs from each digital clock tree can be routed into
the digital system interconnect and then brought back into the
clock system as an input, allowing clock chaining of up to 32 bits.
6.1.4 USB Clock Domain
The USB clock domain is unique in that it operates largely
asynchronously from the main clock network. The USB logic
contains a synchronous bus interface to the chip, while running
on an asynchronous clock to process USB data. The USB logic
requires a 48 MHz frequency. This frequency can be generated
from different sources, including DSI clock at 48 MHz or doubled
value of 24 MHz from internal oscillator, DSI signal, or crystal
oscillator.
6.2 Power System
The power system consists of separate analog, digital, and I/O
supply pins, labeled Vdda, VDDD, and VDDIO×, respectively. It
also includes two internal 1.8 V regulators that provide the digital
(VCCD) and analog (VCCA) supplies for the internal core logic.
The output pins of the regulators (VCCD and VCCA) and the
VDDIO pins must have capacitors connected as shown in
Figure 6-4. The two VCCD pins must be shorted together, with
as short a trace as possible, and connected to a 1-µF ±10% ×5R
capacitor. The power system also contains a sleep regulator, an
I2C regulator, and a hibernate regulator.
Page 29 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 6-4. PSoC Power System
VDDD
1 µF
VDDIO2
VDDD
VSSD
VCCD
I/O Supply
VDDIO2
VDDIO0
0.1 µF
0.1µF
I/O Supply
VDDIO0
0.1 µF
I2C
Regulator
Sleep
Regulator
Digital
Domain
VDDA
VDDA
Digital
Regulators
VSSB
VCCA
Analog
Regulator
0.1µF
1 µF
VSSA
Analog
Domain
0.1 µF
I/O Supply
VDDIO3
VDDD
VSSD
I/O Supply
VCCD
VDDIO1
Hibernate
Regulator
0.1 µF
0.1 µF
VDDIO1
VDDD
VDDIO3
Note The two Vccd pins must be connected together with as short a trace as possible. A trace under the device is recommended, as
shown in Figure 2-8 on page 10.
You can power the device in internally regulated mode, where the voltage applied to the VDDx pins is as high as 5.5 V, and the internal
regulators provide the core voltages. In this mode, do not apply power to the VCCx pins, and do not tie the VDDx pins to the VCCx
pins.
You can also power the device in externally regulated mode, that is, by directly powering the VCCD and VCCA pins. In this configuration,
the VDDD pins should be shorted to the VCCD pins and the VDDA pin should be shorted to the VCCA pin. The allowed supply range in
this configuration is 1.71 V to 1.89 V. After power up in this configuration, the internal regulators are on by default, and should be
disabled to reduce power consumption.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 30 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
6.2.1 Power Modes
Active is the main processing mode. Its functionality is
configurable. Each power controllable subsystem is enabled or
disabled by using separate power configuration template
registers. In alternate active mode, fewer subsystems are
enabled, reducing power. In sleep mode most resources are
disabled regardless of the template settings. Sleep mode is
optimized to provide timed sleep intervals and RTC functionality.
The lowest power mode is hibernate, which retains register and
SRAM state, but no clocks, and allows wakeup only from I/O
pins. Figure 6-5 illustrates the allowable transitions between
power modes. Sleep and hibernate modes should not be entered
until all VDDIO supplies are at valid voltage levels.
PSoC 3 devices have four different power modes, as shown in
Table 6-2 and Table 6-3. The power modes allow a design to
easily provide required functionality and processing power while
simultaneously minimizing power consumption and maximizing
battery life in low-power and portable devices.
PSoC 3 power modes, in order of decreasing power
consumption are:
Active
Alternate Active
Sleep
.
Hibernate
Table 6-2. Power Modes
Power
Modes
Description
Wakeup
Source
Entry Condition
Active Clocks
Regulator
Active
Primary mode of operation, all periph- Wakeup, reset,
erals available (programmable)
manual register
entry
Any interrupt Any
(programmable)
All regulators available. Digital
and analog regulators can be
disabled if external regulation
used.
Alternate
Active
Similar to Active mode, and is typically Manual register
configured to have fewer peripherals entry
active to reduce power. One possible
configuration is to use the UDBs for
processing, with the CPU turned off
Any interrupt Any
(programmable)
All regulators available. Digital
and analog regulators can be
disabled if external regulation
used.
Sleep
All subsystems automatically disabled Manual register
entry
Comparator,
PICU, I2C,
RTC, CTW,
LVD
ILO/kHzECO
Both digital and analog
regulators buzzed.
Digital and analog regulators
can be disabled if external
regulation used.
Hibernate
All subsystems automatically disabled Manual register
Lowest power consuming mode with entry
all peripherals and internal regulators
disabled, except hibernate regulator is
enabled
Configuration and memory contents
retained
PICU
–
Only hibernate regulator active.
Table 6-3. Power Modes Wakeup Time and Power Consumption
Sleep
Modes
Wakeup
Time
Current
(Typ)
Active
–
Alternate
Active
Sleep
Hibernate
Code
Execution
Digital
Resources
Analog
Resources
Clock Sources
Available
Wakeup Sources
Reset
Sources
1.2 mA[16]
Yes
–
–
User
defined
All
All
All
–
All
All
All
All
–
All
<15 µs
1 µA
No
I2C
Comparator
ILO/kHzECO
Comparator,
PICU, I2C, RTC,
CTW, LVD
XRES, LVD,
WDR
<100 µs
200 nA
No
None
None
None
PICU
XRES
Note
16. Bus clock off. Execute from cache at 6 MHz. See Table 11-2 on page 68.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 31 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
6.2.1.5 Wakeup Events
Figure 6-5. Power Mode Transitions
Active
Manual
Sleep
Hibernate
Wakeup events are configurable and can come from an interrupt
or device reset. A wakeup event restores the system to active
mode. Firmware enabled interrupt sources include internally
generated interrupts, power supervisor, central timewheel, and
I/O interrupts. Internal interrupt sources can come from a variety
of peripherals, such as analog comparators and UDBs. The
central timewheel provides periodic interrupts to allow the
system to wake up, poll peripherals, or perform real-time
functions. Reset event sources include the external reset I/O pin
(XRES), WDT, and precision reset (PRES).
6.2.2 Boost Converter
Alternate
Active
6.2.1.1 Active Mode
Active mode is the primary operating mode of the device. When
in active mode, the active configuration template bits control
which available resources are enabled or disabled. When a
resource is disabled, the digital clocks are gated, analog bias
currents are disabled, and leakage currents are reduced as
appropriate. User firmware can dynamically control subsystem
power by setting and clearing bits in the active configuration
template. The CPU can disable itself, in which case the CPU is
automatically reenabled at the next wakeup event.
When a wakeup event occurs, the global mode is always
returned to active, and the CPU is automatically enabled,
regardless of its template settings. Active mode is the default
global power mode upon boot.
6.2.1.2 Alternate Active Mode
Alternate Active mode is very similar to Active mode. In alternate
active mode, fewer subsystems are enabled, to reduce power
consumption. One possible configuration is to turn off the CPU
and flash, and run peripherals at full speed.
6.2.1.3 Sleep Mode
Sleep mode reduces power consumption when a resume time of
15 µs is acceptable. The wake time is used to ensure that the
regulator outputs are stable enough to directly enter active
mode.
6.2.1.4 Hibernate Mode
In hibernate mode nearly all of the internal functions are
disabled. Internal voltages are reduced to the minimal level to
keep vital systems alive. Configuration state is preserved in
hibernate mode and SRAM memory is retained. GPIOs
configured as digital outputs maintain their previous values and
external GPIO pin interrupt settings are preserved. The device
can only return from hibernate mode in response to an external
I/O interrupt. The resume time from hibernate mode is less than
100 µs.
To achieve an extremely low current, the hibernate regulator has
limited capacity. This limits the frequency of any signal present
on the input pins - no GPIO should toggle at a rate greater than
10 kHz while in hibernate mode. If pins must be toggled at a high
rate while in a low power mode, use sleep mode instead.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Applications that use a supply voltage of less than 1.71 V, such
as solar or single cell battery supplies, may use the on-chip boost
converter. The boost converter may also be used in any system
that requires a higher operating voltage than the supply provides.
For instance, this includes driving 5.0 V LCD glass in a 3.3 V
system. The boost converter accepts an input voltage as low as
0.5 V. With one low cost inductor it produces a selectable output
voltage sourcing enough current to operate the PSoC and other
on-board components.
The boost converter accepts an input voltage VBAT from 0.5 V
to 3.6 V, and can start up with VBAT as low as 0.5 V. The
converter provides a user configurable output voltage of 1.8 to
5.0 V (VBOOST). VBAT is typically less than VBOOST; if VBAT
is greater than or equal to VBOOST, then VBOOST will be the
same as VBAT. The block can deliver up to 50 mA (IBOOST)
depending on configuration.
Four pins are associated with the boost converter: VBAT, VSSB,
VBOOST, and Ind. The boosted output voltage is sensed at the
VBOOST pin and must be connected directly to the chip’s supply
inputs. An inductor is connected between the VBAT and Ind pins.
You can optimize the inductor value to increase the boost
converter efficiency based on input voltage, output voltage,
current and switching frequency. The external Schottky diode
shown in Figure 6-6 is required only in cases when VBOOST >
3.6 V.
Figure 6-6. Application for Boost Converter
VBOOST VDDAVDDD VDDIO
Optional
Schottky Diode
Only required
VBOOST>3.6 V
Ind
10 µH
22 µF
SMP
PSoC
22 µF 0. 1 µF
VBAT
VSSB
VSSA
VSSD
The switching frequency can be set to 400 kHz or 32 kHz, to
optimize efficiency and component cost. The 400 kHz frequency
is generated using an oscillator in the boost converter block. The
32 kHz frequency is derived from the 32 kHz external crystal
Page 32 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
oscillator (kHzECO) block. The 32 kHz frequency is primarily
intended for boost standby mode.
Figure 6-7. Resets
VDDD VDDA
At 400 kHz VBOOST is limited to 4 × VBAT.
The boost converter can be operated in two different modes:
active and standby. Active mode is the normal mode of operation
where the boost regulator actively generates a regulated output
voltage. In standby mode, most boost functions are disabled,
thus reducing power consumption of the boost circuit. The
converter can be configured to provide low-power, low-current
regulation in the standby mode. The external 32 kHz crystal can
be used to generate inductor boost pulses on the rising and
falling edge of the clock when the output voltage is less than the
programmed value. This is called automatic thump mode (ATM).
The boost typically draws 200 µA in active mode and 12 µA in
standby mode. The boost operating modes must be used in
conjunction with chip power modes to minimize the total chip
power consumption. Table 6-4 lists the boost power modes
available in different chip power modes.
Table 6-4. Chip and Boost Power Modes Compatibility
Chip Power Modes
Boost Power Modes
Chip – Active mode
Boost can be operated in either active
or standby mode.
Chip – Sleep mode
Boost can be operated in either active
or standby mode. However, it is recommended to operate boost in standby
mode for low-power consumption
Chip – Hibernate mode Boost can only be operated in active
mode. However, it is recommended not
to use boost in chip hibernate mode
due to high current consumption in
boost active mode
If the boost converter is not used in a given application, tie the
VBAT, VSSB, and VBOOST pins to ground and leave the Ind pin
unconnected.
6.3 Reset
CY8C36 has multiple internal and external reset sources
available. The reset sources are:
Power source monitoring – The analog and digital power
voltages, VDDA, VDDD, VCCA, and VCCD are monitored in
several different modes during power up, active mode, and
sleep mode (buzzing). If any of the voltages goes outside
predetermined ranges then a reset is generated. The monitors
are programmable to generate an interrupt to the processor
under certain conditions before reaching the reset thresholds.
External – The device can be reset from an external source by
pulling the reset pin (XRES) low. The XRES pin includes an
internal pull-up to VDDIO1. VDDD, VDDA, and VDDIO1 must
all have voltage applied before the part comes out of reset.
Watchdog timer – A watchdog timer monitors the execution of
instructions by the processor. If the watchdog timer is not reset
by firmware within a certain period of time, the watchdog timer
generates a reset.
Software – The device can be reset under program control.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Power
Voltage
Level
Monitors
Reset
Pin
External
Reset
Processor
Interrupt
Reset
Controller
System
Reset
Watchdog
Timer
Software
Reset
Register
The term device reset indicates that the processor as well as
analog and digital peripherals and registers are reset.
A reset status register shows some of the resets or power voltage
monitoring interrupts. The program may examine this register to
detect and report certain exception conditions. This register is
cleared after a power-on reset. For details see the Technical
Reference Manual.
6.3.1 Reset Sources
6.3.1.1 Power Voltage Level Monitors
IPOR – Initial POR
At initial power on, IPOR monitors the power voltages VDDD,
VDDA, VCCD and VCCA. The trip level is not precise. It is set to
approximately 1 volt, which is below the lowest specified
operating voltage but high enough for the internal circuits to be
reset and to hold their reset state. The monitor generates a
reset pulse that is at least 150 ns wide. It may be much wider
if one or more of the voltages ramps up slowly.
If after the IPOR triggers either VDDX drops back below the
trigger point, in a non-monotonic fashion, it must remain below
that point for at least 10 µs. The hysteresis of the IPOR trigger
point is typically 100 mV.
After boot, the IPOR circuit is disabled and voltage supervision
is handed off to the precise low-voltage reset (PRES) circuit.
PRES – Precise Low Voltage Reset
This circuit monitors the outputs of the analog and digital
internal regulators after power up. The regulator outputs are
compared to a precise reference voltage. The response to a
PRES trip is identical to an IPOR reset.
After PRES has been deasserted, at least 10 µs must elapse
before it can be reasserted.
In normal operating mode, the program cannot disable the
digital PRES circuit. The analog regulator can be disabled,
which also disables the analog portion of the PRES. The PRES
circuit is disabled automatically during sleep and hibernate
Page 33 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
modes, with one exception: During sleep mode the regulators
are periodically activated (buzzed) to provide supervisory
services and to reduce wakeup time. At these times the PRES
circuit is also buzzed to allow periodic voltage monitoring.
ALVI, DLVI, AHVI – Analog/Digital Low Voltage Interrupt,
Analog High Voltage Interrupt
Interrupt circuits are available to detect when Vdda and VDDD
go outside a voltage range. For AHVI, Vdda is compared to a
fixed trip level. For ALVI and DLVI, Vdda and VDDD are
compared to trip levels that are programmable, as listed in
Table 6-5. ALVI and DLVI can also be configured to generate
a device reset instead of an interrupt.
Table 6-5. Analog/Digital Low Voltage Interrupt, Analog High
Voltage Interrupt
Interrupt
DLVI
ALVI
AHVI
Normal Voltage
Available Trip Settings
Range
VDDD 1.71 V–5.5 V
1.70 V–5.45 V in 250 mV
increments
VDDA 1.71 V–5.5 V
1.70 V–5.45 V in 250 mV
increments
VDDA 1.71 V–5.5 V
5.75 V
Supply
The monitors are disabled until after IPOR. During sleep mode
these circuits are periodically activated (buzzed). If an interrupt
occurs during buzzing then the system first enters its wake up
sequence. The interrupt is then recognized and may be
serviced.
The buzz frequency is adjustable, and should be set to be less
than the minimum time that any voltage is expected to be out
of range. For details on how to adjust the buzz frequency, see
the TRM.
6.3.1.2 Other Reset Sources
XRES – External Reset
PSoC 3 has either a single GPIO pin that is configured as an
external reset or a dedicated XRES pin. Either the dedicated
XRES pin or the GPIO pin, if configured, holds the part in reset
while held active (low). The response to an XRES is the same
as to an IPOR reset.
After XRES has been deasserted, at least 10 µs must elapse
before it can be reasserted.
The external reset is active low. It includes an internal pull-up
resistor. XRES is active during sleep and hibernate modes.
SRES – Software Reset
A reset can be commanded under program control by setting
a bit in the software reset register. This is done either directly
by the program or indirectly by DMA access. The response to
a SRES is the same as after an IPOR reset.
Another register bit exists to disable this function.
WRES – Watchdog Timer Reset
The watchdog reset detects when the software program is no
longer being executed correctly. To indicate to the watchdog
timer that it is running correctly, the program must periodically
reset the timer. If the timer is not reset before a user-specified
amount of time, then a reset is generated.
Note IPOR disables the watchdog function. The program must
enable the watchdog function at an appropriate point in the
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
code by setting a register bit. When this bit is set, it cannot be
cleared again except by an IPOR power on reset event.
6.4 I/O System and Routing
PSoC I/Os are extremely flexible. Every GPIO has analog and
digital I/O capability. All I/Os have a large number of drive modes,
which are set at POR. PSoC also provides up to four individual
I/O voltage domains through the VDDIO pins.
There are two types of I/O pins on every device; those with USB
provide a third type. Both General Purpose I/O (GPIO) and
Special I/O (SIO) provide similar digital functionality. The primary
differences are their analog capability and drive strength.
Devices that include USB also provide two USBIO pins that
support specific USB functionality as well as limited GPIO
capability.
All I/O pins are available for use as digital inputs and outputs for
both the CPU and digital peripherals. In addition, all I/O pins can
generate an interrupt. The flexible and advanced capabilities of
the PSoC I/O, combined with any signal to any pin routability,
greatly simplify circuit design and board layout. All GPIO pins can
be used for analog input, CapSense[17], and LCD segment drive,
while SIO pins are used for voltages in excess of VDDA and for
programmable output voltages.
Features supported by both GPIO and SIO:
User programmable port reset state
Separate I/O supplies and voltages for up to four groups of I/O
Digital peripherals use DSI to connect the pins
Input or output or both for CPU and DMA
Eight drive modes
Every pin can be an interrupt source configured as rising
edge, falling edge or both edges. If required, level sensitive
interrupts are supported through the DSI
Dedicated port interrupt vector for each port
Slew rate controlled digital output drive mode
Access port control and configuration registers on either port
basis or pin basis
Separate port read (PS) and write (DR) data registers to avoid
read modify write errors
Special functionality on a pin by pin basis
Additional features only provided on the GPIO pins:
LCD segment drive on LCD equipped devices
[17]
CapSense
Analog input and output capability
Continuous 100 µA clamp current capability
Standard drive strength down to 1.7 V
Additional features only provided on SIO pins:
Higher drive strength than GPIO
Hot swap capability (5 V tolerance at any operating VDD)
Programmable and regulated high input and output drive
levels down to 1.2 V
No analog input, CapSense, or LCD capability
Over voltage tolerance up to 5.5 V
SIO can act as a general purpose analog comparator
USBIO features:
Full speed USB 2.0 compliant I/O
Highest drive strength for general purpose use
Input, output, or both for CPU and DMA
Input, output, or both for digital peripherals
Digital output (CMOS) drive mode
Page 34 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 6-8. GPIO Block Diagram
Digital Input Path
Naming Convention
‘x’ = Port Number
‘y’ = Pin Number
PRT[x]CTL
PRT[x]DBL_SYNC_IN
PRT[x]PS
Digital System Input
PICU[x]INTTYPE[y]
Input Buffer Disable
PICU[x]INTSTAT
Interrupt
Logic
Pin Interrupt Signal
PICU[x]INTSTAT
Digital Output Path
PRT[x]SLW
PRT[x]SYNC_OUT
Vddio Vddio
PRT[x]DR
0
Digital System Output
In
1
Vddio
PRT[x]BYP
Drive
Logic
PRT[x]DM2
PRT[x]DM1
PRT[x]DM0
Bidirectional Control
PRT[x]BIE
Analog
Slew
Cntl
PIN
OE
1
Capsense Global Control
0
1
0
1
CAPS[x]CFG1
Switches
PRT[x]AG
Analog Global
PRT[x]AMUX
Analog Mux
LCD
Display
Data
PRT[x]LCD_COM_SEG
Logic & MUX
PRT[x]LCD_EN
LCD Bias Bus
5
Note
17. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 35 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 6-9. SIO Input/Output Block Diagram
Digital Input Path
PRT[x]SIO_HYST_EN
PRT[x]SIO_DIFF
Reference Level
PRT[x]DBL_SYNC_IN
Naming Convention
‘x’ = Port Number
‘y’ = Pin Number
Buffer
Thresholds
PRT[x]PS
Digital System Input
PICU[x]INTTYPE[y]
Input Buffer Disable
PICU[x]INTSTAT
Interrupt
Logic
Pin Interrupt Signal
PICU[x]INTSTAT
Digital Output Path
Reference Level
PRT[x]SIO_CFG
PRT[x]SLW
PRT[x]SYNC_OUT
PRT[x]DR
Driver
Vhigh
0
Digital System Output
In
1
PRT[x]BYP
Drive
Logic
PRT[x]DM2
PRT[x]DM1
PRT[x]DM0
Bidirectional Control
PRT[x]BIE
Slew
Cntl
PIN
OE
Figure 6-10. USBIO Block Diagram
Digital Input Path
Naming Convention
‘y’ = Pin Number
USB Receiver Circuitry
PRT[15]DBL_SYNC_IN
PRT[15]PS[6,7]
USBIO_CR1[0,1]
Digital System Input
PICU[15]INTTYPE[y]
PICU[15]INTSTAT
Interrupt
Logic
Pin Interrupt Signal
PICU[15]INTSTAT
Digital Output Path
PRT[15]SYNC_OUT
USBIO_CR1[5]
USB or I/O
USBIO_CR1[2]
Vddd
USB SIE Control for USB Mode
PRT[15]DR1[7,6]
Digital System Output
PRT[15]BYP
1
In
Drive
Logic
D+ Open
Drain
PRT[15]DM0[7]
D- Open
Drain
PRT[15]DM1[6]
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
0
PRT[15]DM0[6]
PRT[15]DM1[7]
D+ pin only
D+ 1.5 k
Vddd
5k
Vddd Vddd
1.5 k
PIN
D+ 5 k
D- 5 k
Page 36 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
6.4.1 Drive Modes
Each GPIO and SIO pin is individually configurable into one of the eight drive modes listed in Table 6-6. Three configuration bits are
used for each pin (DM[2:0]) and set in the PRTxDM[2:0] registers. Figure 6-11 depicts a simplified pin view based on each of the eight
drive modes. Table 6-6 shows the I/O pin’s drive state based on the port data register value or digital array signal if bypass mode is
selected. Note that the actual I/O pin voltage is determined by a combination of the selected drive mode and the load at the pin. For
example, if a GPIO pin is configured for resistive pull-up mode and driven high while the pin is floating, the voltage measured at the
pin is a high logic state. If the same GPIO pin is externally tied to ground then the voltage unmeasured at the pin is a low logic state.
Figure 6-11. Drive Mode
Vddio
DR
PS
0.
Pin
High Impedance
Analog
DR
PS
Pin
1. High Impedance
Digital
DR
PS
Pin
2. Resistive
Pull-Up
Vddio
DR
PS
4. Open Drain,
Drives Low
Pin
DR
PS
Vddio
DR
PS
Pin
3. Resistive
Pull-Down
Vddio
Pin
5. Open Drain,
Drives High
DR
PS
Vddio
Pin
6. Strong Drive
DR
PS
Pin
7. Resistive
Pull-Up and Pull-Down
Table 6-6. Drive Modes
Diagram
PRTxDM2
PRTxDM1
PRTxDM0
PRTxDR = 1
PRTxDR = 0
0
High impedance analog
Drive Mode
0
0
0
High Z
High Z
1
High impedance digital
0
0
1
High Z
High Z
2
Resistive pull-up[18]
0
1
0
Res High (5K)
Strong Low
3
Resistive pull-down[18]
0
1
1
Strong High
Res Low (5K)
4
Open drain, drives low
1
0
0
High Z
Strong Low
5
Open drain, drive high
1
0
1
Strong High
High Z
6
Strong drive
1
1
0
Strong High
Strong Low
7
Resistive pull-up and pull-down[18]
1
1
1
Res High (5K)
Res Low (5K)
Note
18. Resistive pull-up and pull-down are not available with SIO in regulated output mode.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 37 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
The USBIO pins (P15[7] and P15[6]), when enabled for I/O mode, have limited drive mode control. The drive mode is set using the
PRT15.DM0[7, 6] register. A resistive pull option is also available at the USBIO pins, which can be enabled using the PRT15.DM1[7,
6] register. When enabled for USB mode, the drive mode control has no impact on the configuration of the USB pins. Unlike the GPIO
and SIO configurations, the port wide configuration registers do not configure the USB drive mode bits. Table 6-7 shows the drive
mode configuration for the USBIO pins.
Table 6-7. USBIO Drive Modes (P15[7] and P15[6])
PRT15.DM1[7,6]
Pull up enable
PRT15.DM0[7,6]
Drive Mode enable
0
0
High Z
Strong Low
Open Drain, Strong Low
0
1
Strong High
Strong Low
Strong Outputs
1
0
Res High (5k)
Strong Low
Resistive Pull Up, Strong Low
1
1
Strong High
Strong Low
Strong Outputs
PRT15.DR[7,6] = 1
High Impedance Analog
The default reset state with both the output driver and digital
input buffer turned off. This prevents any current from flowing
in the I/O’s digital input buffer due to a floating voltage. This
state is recommended for pins that are floating or that support
an analog voltage. High impedance analog pins do not provide
digital input functionality.
To achieve the lowest chip current in sleep modes, all I/Os
must either be configured to the high impedance analog mode,
or have their pins driven to a power supply rail by the PSoC
device or by external circuitry.
High Impedance Digital
The input buffer is enabled for digital signal input. This is the
standard high impedance (HiZ) state recommended for digital
inputs.
Resistive pull-up or resistive pull-down
Resistive pull-up or pull-down, respectively, provides a series
resistance in one of the data states and strong drive in the
other. Pins can be used for digital input and output in these
modes. Interfacing to mechanical switches is a common
application for these modes. Resistive pull-up and pull-down
are not available with SIO in regulated output mode.
Open Drain, Drives High and Open Drain, Drives Low
Open drain modes provide high impedance in one of the data
states and strong drive in the other. Pins can be used for digital
input and output in these modes. A common application for
these modes is driving the I2C bus signal lines.
Strong Drive
Provides a strong CMOS output drive in either high or low
state. This is the standard output mode for pins. Strong Drive
mode pins must not be used as inputs under normal
circumstances. This mode is often used to drive digital output
signals or external FETs.
Resistive pull-up and pull-down
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
PRT15.DR[7,6] = 0
Description
Similar to the resistive pull-up and resistive pull-down modes
except the pin is always in series with a resistor. The high data
state is pull-up while the low data state is pull-down. This mode
is most often used when other signals that may cause shorts
can drive the bus. Resistive pull-up and pull-down are not
available with SIO in regulated output mode.
6.4.2 Pin Registers
Registers to configure and interact with pins come in two forms
that may be used interchangeably.
All I/O registers are available in the standard port form, where
each bit of the register corresponds to one of the port pins. This
register form is efficient for quickly reconfiguring multiple port
pins at the same time.
I/O registers are also available in pin form, which combines the
eight most commonly used port register bits into a single register
for each pin. This enables very fast configuration changes to
individual pins with a single register write.
6.4.3 Bidirectional Mode
High speed bidirectional capability allows pins to provide both
the high impedance digital drive mode for input signals and a
second user selected drive mode such as strong drive (set using
PRT×DM[2:0] registers) for output signals on the same pin,
based on the state of an auxiliary control bus signal. The
bidirectional capability is useful for processor busses and
communications interfaces such as the SPI Slave MISO pin that
requires dynamic hardware control of the output buffer.
The auxiliary control bus routes up to 16 UDB or digital peripheral
generated output enable signals to one or more pins.
6.4.4 Slew Rate Limited Mode
GPIO and SIO pins have fast and slow output slew rate options
for strong and open drain drive modes, not resistive drive modes.
Because it results in reduced EMI, the slow edge rate option is
recommended for signals that are not speed critical, generally
less than 1 MHz. The fast slew rate is for signals between 1 MHz
and 33 MHz. The slew rate is individually configurable for each
pin, and is set by the PRT×SLW registers.
Page 38 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
6.4.5 Pin Interrupts
6.4.9 CapSense
All GPIO and SIO pins are able to generate interrupts to the
system. All eight pins in each port interface to their own Port
Interrupt Control Unit (PICU) and associated interrupt vector.
Each pin of the port is independently configurable to detect rising
edge, falling edge, both edge interrupts, or to not generate an
interrupt.
This section applies only to GPIO pins. All GPIO pins may be
used to create CapSense buttons and sliders[19]. See the
“CapSense” section on page 60 for more information.
Depending on the configured mode for each pin, each time an
interrupt event occurs on a pin, its corresponding status bit of the
interrupt status register is set to “1” and an interrupt request is
sent to the interrupt controller. Each PICU has its own interrupt
vector in the interrupt controller and the pin status register
providing easy determination of the interrupt source down to the
pin level.
Port pin interrupts remain active in all sleep modes allowing the
PSoC device to wake from an externally generated interrupt.
While level sensitive interrupts are not directly supported;
universal digital blocks (UDB) provide this functionality to the
system when needed.
6.4.6 Input Buffer Mode
GPIO and SIO input buffers can be configured at the port level
for the default CMOS input thresholds or the optional LVTTL
input thresholds. All input buffers incorporate Schmitt triggers for
input hysteresis. Additionally, individual pin input buffers can be
disabled in any drive mode.
6.4.7 I/O Power Supplies
Up to four I/O pin power supplies are provided depending on the
device and package. Each I/O supply must be less than or equal
to the voltage on the chip’s analog (VDDA) pin. This feature allows
users to provide different I/O voltage levels for different pins on
the device. Refer to the specific device package pinout to
determine VDDIO capability for a given port and pin.
6.4.10 LCD Segment Drive
This section applies only to GPIO pins. All GPIO pins may be
used to generate Segment and Common drive signals for direct
glass drive of LCD glass. See the “LCD Direct Drive” section on
page 59 for details.
6.4.11 Adjustable Output Level
This section applies only to SIO pins. SIO port pins support the
ability to provide a regulated high output level for interface to
external signals that are lower in voltage than the SIO’s
respective VDDIO. SIO pins are individually configurable to
output either the standard VDDIO level or the regulated output,
which is based on an internally generated reference. Typically a
voltage DAC (VDAC) is used to generate the reference (see
Figure 6-12). The “DAC” section on page 60 has more details on
VDAC use and reference routing to the SIO pins. Resistive
pull-up and pull-down drive modes are not available with SIO in
regulated output mode.
6.4.12 Adjustable Input Level
This section applies only to SIO pins. SIO pins by default support
the standard CMOS and LVTTL input levels but also support a
differential mode with programmable levels. SIO pins are
grouped into pairs. Each pair shares a reference generator block
which, is used to set the digital input buffer reference level for
interface to external signals that differ in voltage from VDDIO.
The reference sets the pins voltage threshold for a high logic
level (see Figure 6-12). Available input thresholds are:
0.5 VDDIO
The SIO port pins support an additional regulated high output
capability, as described in Adjustable Output Level.
0.4 VDDIO
6.4.8 Analog Connections
VREF
These connections apply only to GPIO pins. All GPIO pins may
be used as analog inputs or outputs. The analog voltage present
on the pin must not exceed the VDDIO supply voltage to which
the GPIO belongs. Each GPIO may connect to one of the analog
global busses or to one of the analog mux buses to connect any
pin to any internal analog resource such as ADC or comparators.
In addition, select pins provide direct connections to specific
analog features such as the high current DACs or uncommitted
opamps.
Typically a voltage DAC (VDAC) generates the VREF reference.
“DAC” section on page 60 has more details on VDAC use and
reference routing to the SIO pins.
0.5 VREF
Note
19. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 39 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
6.4.15 Over Voltage Tolerance
Figure 6-12. SIO Reference for Input and Output
All I/O pins provide an over voltage tolerance feature at any
operating VDD.
Input Path
There are no current limitations for the SIO pins as they present a
Digital
Input
high impedance load to the external circuit where VDDIO < VIN <
5.5 V.
Vinref
The GPIO pins must be limited to 100 µA using a current limiting
resistor. GPIO pins clamp the pin voltage to approximately one
diode above the VDDIO supply where VDDIO < VIN < VDDA.
Reference
Generator
SIO_Ref
In case of a GPIO pin configured for analog input/output, the
PIN
Voutref
Output Path
Driver
Vhigh
Digital
Output
Drive
Logic
analog voltage on the pin must not exceed the VDDIO supply
voltage to which the GPIO belongs.
A common application for this feature is connection to a bus such
as I2C where different devices are running from different supply
voltages. In the I2C case, the PSoC chip is configured into the
Open Drain, Drives Low mode for the SIO pin. This allows an
external pull-up to pull the I2C bus voltage above the PSoC pin
supply. For example, the PSoC chip could operate at 1.8 V, and
an external device could run from 5 V. Note that the SIO pin’s VIH
and VIL levels are determined by the associated VDDIO supply
pin.
The SIO pin must be in one of the following modes: 0 (high
impedance analog), 1 (high impedance digital), or 4 (open drain
drives low). See Figure 6-11 for details. Absolute maximum
ratings for the device must be observed for all I/O pins.
6.4.16 Reset Configuration
6.4.13 SIO as Comparator
This section applies only to SIO pins. The adjustable input level
feature of the SIOs as explained in the Adjustable Input Level
section can be used to construct a comparator. The threshold for
the comparator is provided by the SIO's reference generator. The
reference generator has the option to set the analog signal
routed through the analog global line as threshold for the
comparator. Note that a pair of SIO pins share the same
threshold.
The digital input path in Figure 6-9 on page 36 illustrates this
functionality. In the figure, ‘Reference level’ is the analog signal
routed through the analog global. The hysteresis feature can
also be enabled for the input buffer of the SIO, which increases
noise immunity for the comparator.
6.4.14 Hot Swap
This section applies only to SIO pins. SIO pins support ‘hot swap’
capability to plug into an application without loading the signals
that are connected to the SIO pins even when no power is
applied to the PSoC device. This allows the unpowered PSoC to
maintain a high impedance load to the external device while also
preventing the PSoC from being powered through a SIO pin’s
protection diode.
Powering the device up or down while connected to an
operational I2C bus may cause transient states on the SIO pins.
The overall I2C bus design should take this into account.
While reset is active all I/Os are reset to and held in the High
Impedance Analog state. After reset is released, the state can be
reprogrammed on a port-by-port basis to pull-down or pull-up. To
ensure correct reset operation, the port reset configuration data
is stored in special nonvolatile registers. The stored reset data is
automatically transferred to the port reset configuration registers
at reset release.
6.4.17 Low-Power Functionality
In all low-power modes the I/O pins retain their state until the part
is awakened and changed or reset. To awaken the part, use a
pin interrupt, because the port interrupt logic continues to
function in all low-power modes.
6.4.18 Special Pin Functionality
Some pins on the device include additional special functionality
in addition to their GPIO or SIO functionality. The specific special
function pins are listed in Pinouts on page 5. The special features
are:
Digital
4- to 25-MHz crystal oscillator
32.768-kHz crystal oscillator
2
Wake from sleep on I C address match. Any pin can be used
for I2C if wake from sleep is not required.
JTAG interface pins
SWD interface pins
SWV interface pins
External reset
Analog
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Opamp inputs and outputs
Page 40 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
7.1 Example Peripherals
High current IDAC outputs
External reference inputs
6.4.19 JTAG Boundary Scan
The device supports standard JTAG boundary scan chains on all
I/O pins for board level test.
7. Digital Subsystem
The digital programmable system creates application specific
combinations of both standard and advanced digital peripherals
and custom logic functions. These peripherals and logic are then
interconnected to each other and to any pin on the device,
providing a high level of design flexibility and IP security.
The features of the digital programmable system are outlined
here to provide an overview of capabilities and architecture. You
do not need to interact directly with the programmable digital
system at the hardware and register level. PSoC Creator
provides a high level schematic capture graphical interface to
automatically place and route resources similar to PLDs.
The main components of the digital programmable system are:
Universal Digital Blocks (UDB) – These form the core
functionality of the digital programmable system. UDBs are a
collection of uncommitted logic (PLD) and structural logic
(Datapath) optimized to create all common embedded
peripherals and customized functionality that are application or
design specific.
Universal Digital Block Array – UDB blocks are arrayed within
a matrix of programmable interconnect. The UDB array
structure is homogeneous and allows for flexible mapping of
digital functions onto the array. The array supports extensive
and flexible routing interconnects between UDBs and the
Digital System Interconnect.
Digital System Interconnect (DSI) – Digital signals from
Universal Digital Blocks (UDBs), fixed function peripherals, I/O
pins, interrupts, DMA, and other system core signals are
attached to the Digital System Interconnect to implement full
featured device connectivity. The DSI allows any digital function
to any pin or other feature routability when used with the
Universal Digital Block Array.
Figure 7-1. CY8C36 Digital Programmable Architecture
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
7.1.1 Example Digital Components
The following is a sample of the digital components available in
PSoC Creator for the CY8C36 family. The exact amount of
hardware resources (UDBs, routing, RAM, flash) used by a
component varies with the features selected in PSoC Creator for
the component.
Communications
I2C
UART
SPI
Functions
EMIF
PWMs
Timers
Counters
Logic
NOT
OR
XOR
AND
7.1.2 Example Analog Components
The following is a sample of the analog components available in
PSoC Creator for the CY8C36 family. The exact amount of
hardware resources (SC/CT blocks, routing, RAM, flash) used
by a component varies with the features selected in PSoC
Creator for the component.
Amplifiers
TIA
PGA
opamp
Delta-Sigma
DACs
Current
Voltage
PWM
IO Port
DSI Routing Interface
Digital Core System
and Fixed Function Peripherals
The number of components available through PSoC Creator is
too numerous to list in the data sheet, and the list is always
growing. An example of a component available for use in
CY8C36 family, but, not explicitly called out in this data sheet is
the UART component.
ADC
UDB Array
DSI Routing Interface
UDB Array
IO Port
IO Port
IO Port
Digital Core System
and Fixed Function Peripherals
The flexibility of the CY8C36 family’s Universal Digital Blocks
(UDBs) and Analog Blocks allow the user to create a wide range
of components (peripherals). The most common peripherals
were built and characterized by Cypress and are shown in the
PSoC Creator component catalog, however, users may also
create their own custom components using PSoC Creator. Using
PSoC Creator, users may also create their own components for
reuse within their organization, for example sensor interfaces,
proprietary algorithms, and display interfaces.
Comparators
Mixers
Page 41 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
7.1.3 Example System Function Components
The following is a sample of the system function components
available in PSoC Creator for the CY8C36 family. The exact
amount of hardware resources (UDBs, DFB taps, SC/CT blocks,
routing, RAM, flash) used by a component varies with the
features selected in PSoC Creator for the component.
CapSense
LCD Drive
graphical design tool. This unique combination of tools makes
PSoC Creator the most flexible embedded design platform
available.
Graphical design entry simplifies the task of configuring a
particular part. You can select the required functionality from an
extensive catalog of components and place it in your design. All
components are parameterized and have an editor dialog that
allows you to tailor functionality to your needs.
PSoC Creator automatically configures clocks and routes the I/O
to the selected pins and then generates APIs to give the
application complete control over the hardware. Changing the
PSoC device configuration is as simple as adding a new
component, setting its parameters, and rebuilding the project.
LCD Control
Filters
7.1.4 Designing with PSoC Creator
7.1.4.1 More Than a Typical IDE
A successful design tool allows for the rapid development and
deployment of both simple and complex designs. It reduces or
eliminates any learning curve. It makes the integration of a new
design into the production stream straightforward.
PSoC Creator is that design tool.
PSoC Creator is a full featured Integrated Development
Environment (IDE) for hardware and software design. It is
optimized specifically for PSoC devices and combines a modern,
powerful software development platform with a sophisticated
At any stage of development you are free to change the
hardware configuration and even the target processor. To
retarget your application (hardware and software) to new
devices, even from 8- to 32-bit families, just select the new
device and rebuild.
You also have the ability to change the C compiler and evaluate
an alternative. Components are designed for portability and are
validated against all devices, from all families, and against all
supported tool chains. Switching compilers is as easy as editing
the from the project options and rebuilding the application with
no errors from the generated APIs or boot code.
Figure 7-2. PSoC Creator Framework
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 42 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
7.1.4.2 Component Catalog
7.1.4.4 Software Development
Figure 7-3. Component Catalog
Figure 7-4. Code Editor
Anchoring the tool is a modern, highly customizable user
interface. It includes project management and integrated editors
for C and assembler source code, as well the design entry tools.
The component catalog is a repository of reusable design
elements that select device functionality and customize your
PSoC device. It is populated with an impressive selection of
content; from simple primitives such as logic gates and device
registers, through the digital timers, counters and PWMs, plus
analog components such as ADC, DACs, and filters, and
communication protocols, such as I2C, USB, and CAN. See
Example Peripherals on page 41 for more details about available
peripherals. All content is fully characterized and carefully
documented in data sheets with code examples, AC/DC
specifications, and user code ready APIs.
Project build control leverages compiler technology from top
commercial vendors such as ARM® Limited, Keil™, and
CodeSourcery (GNU). Free versions of Keil C51 and GNU C
Compiler (GCC) for ARM, with no restrictions on code size or end
product distribution, are included with the tool distribution.
Upgrading to more optimizing compilers is a snap with support
for the professional Keil C51 product and ARM RealView™
compiler.
7.1.4.5 Nonintrusive Debugging
Figure 7-5. PSoC Creator Debugger
7.1.4.3 Design Reuse
The symbol editor gives you the ability to develop reusable
components that can significantly reduce future design time. Just
draw a symbol and associate that symbol with your proven
design. PSoC Creator allows for the placement of the new
symbol anywhere in the component catalog along with the
content provided by Cypress. You can then reuse your content
as many times as you want, and in any number of projects,
without ever having to revisit the details of the implementation.
With JTAG (4-wire) and SWD (2-wire) debug connectivity
available on all devices, the PSoC Creator debugger offers full
control over the target device with minimum intrusion.
Breakpoints and code execution commands are all readily
available from toolbar buttons and an impressive lineup of
windows—register, locals, watch, call stack, memory and
peripherals—make for an unparalleled level of visibility into the
system.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 43 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
PSoC Creator contains all the tools necessary to complete a
design, and then to maintain and extend that design for years to
come. All steps of the design flow are carefully integrated and
optimized for ease-of-use and to maximize productivity.
Status and control module – The primary role of this block is to
provide a way for CPU firmware to interact and synchronize
with UDB operation.
Clock and reset module – This block provides the UDB clocks
and reset selection and control.
7.2 Universal Digital Block
The universal digital block (UDB) represents an evolutionary
step to the next generation of PSoC embedded digital peripheral
functionality. The architecture in first generation PSoC digital
blocks provides coarse programmability in which a few fixed
functions with a small number of options are available. The new
UDB architecture is the optimal balance between configuration
granularity and efficient implementation. A cornerstone of this
approach is to provide the ability to customize the devices digital
operation to match application requirements.
The primary purpose of the PLD blocks is to implement logic
expressions, state machines, sequencers, lookup tables, and
decoders. In the simplest use model, consider the PLD blocks as
a standalone resource onto which general purpose RTL is
synthesized and mapped. The more common and efficient use
model is to create digital functions from a combination of PLD
and datapath blocks, where the PLD implements only the
random logic and state portion of the function while the datapath
(ALU) implements the more structured elements.
Figure 7-7. PLD 12C4 Structure
PT0
PT1
PT2
PT3
PT4
PT5
PT6
PT7
To achieve this, UDBs consist of a combination of uncommitted
logic (PLD), structured logic (Datapath), and a flexible routing
scheme to provide interconnect between these elements, I/O
connections, and other peripherals. UDB functionality ranges
from simple self contained functions that are implemented in one
UDB, or even a portion of a UDB (unused resources are
available for other functions), to more complex functions that
require multiple UDBs. Examples of basic functions are timers,
counters, CRC generators, PWMs, dead band generators, and
communications functions, such as UARTs, SPI, and I2C. Also,
the PLD blocks and connectivity provide full featured general
purpose programmable logic within the limits of the available
resources.
7.2.1 PLD Module
IN0
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
IN1
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
IN2
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
IN3
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
IN4
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
IN5
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
IN6
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
IN7
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
IN8
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
IN9
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
IN10
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
IN11
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
Figure 7-6. UDB Block Diagram
PLD
Chaining
Clock
and Reset
Control
Status and
Control
PLD
12C4
(8 PTs)
PLD
12C4
(8 PTs)
Datapath
Datapath
Chaining
Routing Channel
The main component blocks of the UDB are:
PLD blocks – There are two small PLDs per UDB. These blocks
take inputs from the routing array and form registered or
combinational sum-of-products logic. PLDs are used to
implement state machines, state bits, and combinational logic
equations. PLD configuration is automatically generated from
graphical primitives.
AND
Array
SELIN
(carry in)
OUT0
MC0
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
OUT1
MC1
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
OUT2
MC2
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
OUT3
MC3
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
SELOUT
(carry out)
OR
Array
One 12C4 PLD block is shown in Figure 7-7. This PLD has 12
inputs, which feed across eight product terms. Each product term
(AND function) can be from 1 to 12 inputs wide, and in a given
product term, the true (T) or complement (C) of each input can
be selected. The product terms are summed (OR function) to
create the PLD outputs. A sum can be from 1 to 8 product terms
wide. The 'C' in 12C4 indicates that the width of the OR gate (in
this case 8) is constant across all outputs (rather than variable
as in a 22V10 device). This PLA like structure gives maximum
flexibility and insures that all inputs and outputs are permutable
for ease of allocation by the software tools. There are two 12C4
PLDs in each UDB.
Datapath module – This 8-bit wide datapath contains structured
logic to implement a dynamically configurable ALU, a variety
of compare configurations and condition generation. This block
also contains input/output FIFOs, which are the primary parallel
data interface between the CPU/DMA system and the UDB.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 44 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
7.2.2 Datapath Module
The datapath contains an 8-bit single cycle ALU, with associated compare and condition generation logic. This datapath block is
optimized to implement embedded functions, such as timers, counters, integrators, PWMs, PRS, CRC, shifters and dead band
generators and many others.
Figure 7-8. Datapath Top Level
PHUB System Bus
R/W Access to All
Registers
F1
F0
D1
Data Registers
A0
A1
D0
D1
D0
To/From
Previous
Datapath
A1
Conditions: 2 Compares,
2 Zero Detect, 2 Ones
Detect Overflow Detect
6
Datapath Control
Input from
Programmable
Routing
Control Store RAM
8 Word X 16 Bit
FIFOs
Input
Muxes
Chaining
Output
Muxes
6
Output to
Programmable
Routing
To/From
Next
Datapath
Accumulators
A0
PI
Parallel Input/Output
(To/From Programmable Routing)
PO
ALU
Shift
Mask
7.2.2.1 Working Registers
The datapath contains six primary working registers, which are
accessed by CPU firmware or DMA during normal operation.
Table 7-1. Working Datapath Registers
Name
Function
Description
A0 and A1 Accumulators
These are sources and sinks for
the ALU and also sources for the
compares.
D0 and D1 Data Registers
These are sources for the ALU
and sources for the compares.
F0 and F1 FIFOs
These are the primary interface
to the system bus. They can be a
data source for the data registers
and accumulators or they can
capture data from the
accumulators or ALU. Each FIFO
is four bytes deep.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
7.2.2.2 Dynamic Datapath Configuration RAM
Dynamic configuration is the ability to change the datapath
function and internal configuration on a cycle-by-cycle basis,
under sequencer control. This is implemented using the
8-word × 16-bit configuration RAM, which stores eight unique
16-bit wide configurations. The address input to this RAM
controls the sequence, and can be routed from any block
connected to the UDB routing matrix, most typically PLD logic,
I/O pins, or from the outputs of this or other datapath blocks.
ALU
The ALU performs eight general purpose functions. They are:
Increment
Decrement
Add
Subtract
Logical AND
Logical OR
Logical XOR
Pass, used to pass a value through the ALU to the shift register,
mask, or another UDB register
Page 45 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Independent of the ALU operation, these functions are available:
7.2.2.8 Time Multiplexing
Shift left
In applications that are over sampled, or do not need high clock
rates, the single ALU block in the datapath can be efficiently
shared with two sets of registers and condition generators. Carry
and shift out data from the ALU are registered and can be
selected as inputs in subsequent cycles. This provides support
for 16-bit functions in one (8-bit) datapath.
Shift right
Nibble swap
Bitwise OR mask
7.2.2.9 Datapath I/O
7.2.2.3 Conditionals
Each datapath has two compares, with bit masking options.
Compare operands include the two accumulators and the two
data registers in a variety of configurations. Other conditions
include zero detect, all ones detect, and overflow. These
conditions are the primary datapath outputs, a selection of which
can be driven out to the UDB routing matrix. Conditional
computation can use the built in chaining to neighboring UDBs
to operate on wider data widths without the need to use routing
resources.
There are six inputs and six outputs that connect the datapath to
the routing matrix. Inputs from the routing provide the
configuration for the datapath operation to perform in each cycle,
and the serial data inputs. Inputs can be routed from other UDB
blocks, other device peripherals, device I/O pins, and so on. The
outputs to the routing can be selected from the generated
conditions, and the serial data outputs. Outputs can be routed to
other UDB blocks, device peripherals, interrupt and DMA
controller, I/O pins, and so on.
7.2.2.4 Variable MSB
7.2.3 Status and Control Module
The most significant bit of an arithmetic and shift function can be
programmatically specified. This supports variable width CRC
and PRS functions, and in conjunction with ALU output masking,
can implement arbitrary width timers, counters and shift blocks.
The primary purpose of this circuitry is to coordinate CPU
firmware interaction with internal UDB operation.
Figure 7-10. Status and Control Registers
System Bus
7.2.2.5 Built in CRC/PRS
The datapath has built in support for single cycle CRC
computation and PRS generation of arbitrary width and arbitrary
polynomial. CRC/PRS functions longer than 8 bits may be
implemented in conjunction with PLD logic, or built in chaining
may be use to extend the function into neighboring UDBs.
8-bit Control Register
(Write/Read)
Routing Channel
7.2.2.6 Input/Output FIFOs
Each datapath contains two four-byte deep FIFOs, which can be
independently configured as an input buffer (system bus writes
to the FIFO, datapath internal reads the FIFO), or an output
buffer (datapath internal writes to the FIFO, the system bus reads
from the FIFO). The FIFOs generate status that are selectable
as datapath outputs and can therefore be driven to the routing,
to interact with sequencers, interrupts, or DMA.
Figure 7-9. Example FIFO Configurations
System Bus
8-bit Status Register
(Read Only)
System Bus
The bits of the control register, which may be written to by the
system bus, are used to drive into the routing matrix, and thus
provide firmware with the opportunity to control the state of UDB
processing. The status register is read-only and it allows internal
UDB state to be read out onto the system bus directly from
internal routing. This allows firmware to monitor the state of UDB
processing. Each bit of these registers has programmable
connections to the routing matrix and routing connections are
made depending on the requirements of the application.
7.2.3.1 Usage Examples
F0
D0/D1
A0/A1/ALU
A0/A1/ALU
A0/A1/ALU
F1
F0
F1
System Bus
System Bus
TX/RX
Dual Capture
F0
F1
D0
A0
D1
A1
Dual Buffer
7.2.2.7 Chaining
The datapath can be configured to chain conditions and signals
such as carries and shift data with neighboring datapaths to
create higher precision arithmetic, shift, CRC/PRS functions.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
As an example of control input, a bit in the control register can
be allocated as a function enable bit. There are multiple ways to
enable a function. In one method the control bit output would be
routed to the clock control block in one or more UDBs and serve
as a clock enable for the selected UDB blocks. A status example
is a case where a PLD or datapath block generated a condition,
such as a “compare true” condition that is captured and latched
by the status register and then read (and cleared) by CPU
firmware.
7.2.3.2 Clock Generation
Each subcomponent block of a UDB including the two PLDs, the
datapath, and Status and Control, has a clock selection and
control block. This promotes a fine granularity with respect to
allocating clocking resources to UDB component blocks and
allows unused UDB resources to be used by other functions for
maximum system efficiency.
Page 46 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
7.3 UDB Array Description
Figure 7-12. Function Mapping Example in a Bank of UDBs
Figure 7-11. Digital System Interface Structure
UDB
HV
A
UDB
Quadrature Decoder
UDB
HV
A
UDB
HV
A
UDB
HV
B
UDB
UDB
UDB
UDB
HV
A
HV
B
UDB
8-Bit
Timer Logic
UDB
12-Bit SPI
UDB
HV
B
UDB
HV
A
UDB
HV
B
HV
A
Logic
UDB
HV
A
16-Bit PYRS
8-Bit SPI
UDB
HV
B
16-Bit
PWM
HV
B
UDB
UDB
UDB
HV
A
UDB
I2C Slave
System Connections
HV
B
8-Bit
Timer
Sequencer
Figure 7-11 shows an example of a 16-UDB array. In addition to
the array core, there are a DSI routing interfaces at the top and
bottom of the array. Other interfaces that are not explicitly shown
include the system interfaces for bus and clock distribution. The
UDB array includes multiple horizontal and vertical routing
channels each comprised of 96 wires. The wire connections to
UDBs, at horizontal/vertical intersection and at the DSI interface
are highly permutable providing efficient automatic routing in
PSoC Creator. Additionally the routing allows wire by wire
segmentation along the vertical and horizontal routing to further
increase routing flexibility and capability.
HV
B
UDB
UART
UDB
UDB
12-Bit PWM
UDB
7.4 DSI Routing Interface Description
UDB
UDB
HV
B
UDB
UDB
HV
A
UDB
HV
A
HV
B
UDB
HV
B
HV
A
The DSI routing interface is a continuation of the horizontal and
vertical routing channels at the top and bottom of the UDB array
core. It provides general purpose programmable routing
between device peripherals, including UDBs, I/Os, analog
peripherals, interrupts, DMA and fixed function peripherals.
HV
B
Figure 7-13 illustrates the concept of the digital system
interconnect, which connects the UDB array routing matrix with
other device peripherals. Any digital core or fixed function
peripheral that needs programmable routing is connected to this
interface.
UDB
UDB
HV
A
Signals in this category include:
System Connections
Interrupt requests from all digital peripherals in the system.
DMA requests from all digital peripherals in the system.
7.3.1 UDB Array Programmable Resources
Figure 7-12 shows an example of how functions are mapped into
a bank of 16 UDBs. The primary programmable resources of the
UDB are two PLDs, one datapath and one status/control register.
These resources are allocated independently, because they
have independently selectable clocks, and therefore unused
blocks are allocated to other unrelated functions.
Digital peripheral data signals that need flexible routing to I/Os.
Digital peripheral data signals that need connections to UDBs.
Connections to the interrupt and DMA controllers.
Connection to I/O pins.
Connection to analog system digital signals.
An example of this is the 8-bit Timer in the upper left corner of
the array. This function only requires one datapath in the UDB,
and therefore the PLD resources may be allocated to another
function. A function such as a Quadrature Decoder may require
more PLD logic than one UDB can supply and in this case can
utilize the unused PLD blocks in the 8-bit Timer UDB.
Programmable resources in the UDB array are generally
homogeneous so functions can be mapped to arbitrary
boundaries in the array.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 47 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
7.4.1 I/O Port Routing
Figure 7-13. Digital System Interconnect
Timer
Counters
CAN
Interrupt
Controller
I2C
DMA
Controller
IO Port
Pins
Global
Clocks
Digital System Routing I/F
UDB ARRAY
There are a total of 20 DSI routes to a typical 8-bit I/O port, 16
for data and four for drive strength control.
When an I/O pin is connected to the routing, there are two
primary connections available, an input and an output. In
conjunction with drive strength control, this can implement a
bidirectional I/O pin. A data output signal has the option to be
single synchronized (pipelined) and a data input signal has the
option to be double synchronized. The synchronization clock is
the master clock (see Figure 6-1 on page 27). Normally all inputs
from pins are synchronized as this is required if the CPU
interacts with the signal or any signal derived from it.
Asynchronous inputs have rare uses. An example of this is a
feed through of combinational PLD logic from input pins to output
pins.
Figure 7-15. I/O Pin Synchronization Routing
Digital System Routing I/F
DO
DI
Global
Clocks
IO Port
Pins
EMIF
Del-Sig
SC/CT
Blocks
DACs
Comparators
Figure 7-16. I/O Pin Output Connectivity
Interrupt and DMA routing is very flexible in the CY8C36
programmable architecture. In addition to the numerous fixed
function peripherals that can generate interrupt requests, any
data signal in the UDB array routing can also be used to generate
a request. A single peripheral may generate multiple
independent interrupt requests simplifying system and firmware
design. Figure 7-14 shows the structure of the IDMUX
(Interrupt/DMA Multiplexer).
8 IO Data Output Connections from the
UDB Array Digital System Interface
Figure 7-14. Interrupt and DMA Processing in the IDMUX
Interrupt and DMA Processing in IDMUX
Fixed Function IRQs
DO
PIN 0
0
1
IRQs
UDB Array
2
Edge
Detect
DO
PIN4
DO
PIN5
DO
PIN6
DO
PIN7
Port i
0
1
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
DO
PIN3
3
DMA termout (IRQs)
Edge
Detect
DO
PIN2
Interrupt
Controller
DRQs
Fixed Function DRQs
DO
PIN1
2
DMA
Controller
There are four more DSI connections to a given I/O port to
implement dynamic output enable control of pins. This
connectivity gives a range of options, from fully ganged 8-bits
controlled by one signal, to up to four individually controlled pins.
The output enable signal is useful for creating tri-state
bidirectional pins and buses.
Page 48 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
7.5 CAN
Figure 7-17. I/O Pin Output Enable Connectivity
The CAN peripheral is a fully functional CAN supporting
communication baud rates up to 1 Mbps. The CAN controller
implements the CAN2.0A and CAN2.0B specifications as
defined in the Bosch specification and conforms to the
ISO-11898-1 standard. The CAN protocol was originally
designed for automotive applications with a focus on a high level
of fault detection. This ensures high communication reliability at
a low cost. Because of its success in automotive applications,
CAN is used as a standard communication protocol for motion
oriented machine control networks (CANOpen) and factory
automation applications (DeviceNet). The CAN controller
features allow the efficient implementation of higher level
protocols without affecting the performance of the
microcontroller CPU. Full configuration support is provided in
PSoC Creator.
4 IO Control Signal Connections from
UDB Array Digital System Interface
OE
PIN 0
OE
PIN1
OE
PIN2
OE
PIN3
OE
PIN4
OE
PIN5
OE
PIN6
OE
PIN7
Port i
Figure 7-18. CAN Bus System Implementation
CAN Node 1
CAN Node 2
CAN Node n
PSoC
CAN
Drivers
CAN Controller
En
Tx Rx
CAN Transceiver
CAN_H
CAN_L
CAN_H
CAN_L
CAN_H
CAN_L
CAN Bus
7.5.1 CAN Features
CAN2.0A/B protocol implementation – ISO 11898 compliant
Standard and extended frames with up to 8 bytes of data per
frame
Message filter capabilities
Remote Transmission Request (RTR) support
Programmable bit rate up to 1 Mbps
Listen Only mode
SW readable error counter and indicator
Sleep mode: Wake the device from sleep with activity on the
Rx pin
Supports two or three wire interface to external transceiver (Tx,
Rx, and Enable). The three-wire interface is compatible with
the Philips PHY; the PHY is not included on-chip. The three
wires can be routed to any I/O
Enhanced interrupt controller
CAN receive and transmit buffers status
CAN controller error status including BusOff
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Receive path
16 receive buffers each with its own message filter
Enhanced hardware message filter implementation that
covers the ID, IDE, and RTR
DeviceNet addressing support
Multiple receive buffers linkable to build a larger receive
message array
Automatic transmission request (RTR) response handler
Lost received message notification
Transmit path
Eight transmit buffers
Programmable transmit priority
• Round robin
• Fixed priority
Message transmissions abort capability
7.5.2 Software Tools Support
CAN Controller configuration integrated into PSoC Creator:
CAN Configuration walkthrough with bit timing analyzer
Receive filter setup
Page 49 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 7-19. CAN Controller Block Diagram
TxMessage0
TxReq
TxAbort
Tx Buffer
Status
TxReq
Pending
TxMessage1
TxReq
TxAbort
Bit Timing
Priority
Arbiter
TxMessage6
TxReq
TxAbort
TxInterrupt
Request
(if enabled)
TxMessage7
TxReq
TxAbort
RxInterrupt
Request
(if enabled)
RxMessage0
Acceptance Code 0
Acceptance Mask 0
RxMessage1
Acceptance Code 1
Acceptance Mask 1
RxMessage
Handler
RxMessage14
Acceptance Code 14
Acceptance Mask 14
RxMessage15
Acceptance Code 15
Acceptance Mask 15
ErrInterrupt
Request
(if enabled)
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Tx
CRC
Generator
Error Status
Error Active
Error Passive
Bus Off
Tx Error Counter
Rx Error Counter
RTR RxMessages
0-15
Rx Buffer
Status
RxMessage
Available
Tx
CAN
Framer
Rx
CAN
Framer
Rx
CRC Check
Error Detection
CRC
Form
ACK
Bit Stuffing
Bit Error
Overload
Arbitration
WakeUp
Request
Page 50 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
7.6 USB
7.7 Timers, Counters, and PWMs
PSoC includes a dedicated Full-Speed (12 Mbps) USB 2.0
transceiver supporting all four USB transfer types: control,
interrupt, bulk, and isochronous. PSoC Creator provides full
configuration support. USB interfaces to hosts through two
dedicated USBIO pins, which are detailed in the “I/O System and
Routing” section on page 34.
The Timer/Counter/PWM peripheral is a 16-bit dedicated
peripheral providing three of the most common embedded
peripheral features. As almost all embedded systems use some
combination of timers, counters, and PWMs. Four of them have
been included on this PSoC device family. Additional and more
advanced functionality timers, counters, and PWMs can also be
instantiated in Universal Digital Blocks (UDBs) as required.
PSoC Creator allows you to choose the timer, counter, and PWM
features that they require. The tool set utilizes the most optimal
resources available.
USB includes the following features:
Eight unidirectional data endpoints
One bidirectional control endpoint 0 (EP0)
Shared 512-byte buffer for the eight data endpoints
Dedicated 8-byte buffer for EP0
Three memory modes
Manual Memory Management with No DMA Access
Manual Memory Management with Manual DMA Access
Automatic Memory Management with Automatic DMA
Access
Internal 3.3-V regulator for transceiver
Internal 48-MHz main oscillator mode that auto locks to USB
bus clock, requiring no external crystal for USB (USB equipped
parts only)
Interrupts on bus and each endpoint event, with device wakeup
USB reset, suspend, and resume operations
Bus-powered and self-powered modes
Figure 7-20. USB
System Bus
Arbiter
512 X 8
SRAM
D+
SI E
(Serial Interface
Engine)
Interrupts
External 22
Resistors
USB
I/O
D–
48 MHz
IMO
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
The Timer/Counter/PWM peripheral can select from multiple
clock sources, with input and output signals connected through
the DSI routing. DSI routing allows input and output connections
to any device pin and any internal digital signal accessible
through the DSI. Each of the four instances has a compare
output, terminal count output (optional complementary compare
output), and programmable interrupt request line. The
Timer/Counter/PWMs are configurable as free running, one shot,
or Enable input controlled. The peripheral has timer reset and
capture inputs, and a kill input for control of the comparator
outputs. The peripheral supports full 16-bit capture.
Timer/Counter/PWM features include:
16-bit Timer/Counter/PWM (down count only)
Selectable clock source
PWM comparator (configurable for LT, LTE, EQ, GTE, GT)
Period reload on start, reset, and terminal count
Interrupt on terminal count, compare true, or capture
Dynamic counter reads
Timer capture mode
Count while enable signal is asserted mode
Free run mode
One Shot mode (stop at end of period)
Complementary PWM outputs with deadband
PWM output kill
Figure 7-21. Timer/Counter/PWM
Clock
Reset
Enable
Capture
Kill
Timer / Counter /
PWM 16-bit
IRQ
TC / Compare!
Compare
Page 51 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
7.8 I2C
The I2C peripheral provides a synchronous two wire interface
designed to interface the PSoC device with a two wire I2C serial
communication bus. The bus is compatible with Philips ‘The I2C
Specification’ version 2.1. Additional I2C interfaces can be
instantiated using Universal Digital Blocks (UDBs) in PSoC
Creator, as required.
To eliminate the need for excessive CPU intervention and
overhead, I2C specific support is provided for status detection
and generation of framing bits. I2C operates as a slave, a master,
or multimaster (Slave and Master)[20]. In slave mode, the unit
always listens for a start condition to begin sending or receiving
data. Master mode supplies the ability to generate the Start and
Stop conditions and initiate transactions. Multimaster mode
provides clock synchronization and arbitration to allow multiple
masters on the same bus. If Master mode is enabled and Slave
mode is not enabled, the block does not generate interrupts on
externally generated Start conditions. I2C interfaces through DSI
routing and allows direct connections to any GPIO or SIO pins.
I2C provides hardware address detect of a 7-bit address without
CPU intervention. Additionally the device can wake from
low-power modes on a 7-bit hardware address match. If wakeup
functionality is required, I2C pin connections are limited to the
two special sets of SIO pins.
I2C features include:
Slave and master, transmitter, and receiver operation
Byte processing for low CPU overhead
Interrupt or polling CPU interface
Support for bus speeds up to 1 Mbps
7 or 10-bit addressing (10-bit addressing requires firmware
support)
SMBus operation (through firmware support – SMBus
supported in hardware in UDBs)
7-bit hardware address compare
Wake from low-power modes on address match
Data transfers follow the format shown in Figure 7-22. After the
START condition (S), a slave address is sent. This address is 7
bits long followed by an eighth bit which is a data direction bit
(R/W) - a 'zero' indicates a transmission (WRITE), a 'one'
indicates a request for data (READ). A data transfer is always
terminated by a STOP condition (P) generated by the master.
However, if a master still wishes to communicate on the bus, it
can generate a repeated START condition (Sr) and address
another slave without first generating a STOP condition. Various
combinations of read/write formats are then possible within such
a transfer.
Figure 7-22. I2C Complete Transfer Timing
SDA
1-7
SCL
START
Condition
ADDRESS
8
9
R/W
ACK
1-7
8
DATA
9
ACK
1-7
8
DATA
9
ACK
STOP
Condition
Note
20. Fixed-block I2C does not support undefined bus conditions. These conditions should be avoided, or the UDB-based I2C component should be used instead.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 52 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
7.9 Digital Filter Block
Some devices in the CY8C36 family of devices have a dedicated
HW accelerator block used for digital filtering. The DFB has a
dedicated multiplier and accumulator that calculates a 24-bit by
24-bit multiply accumulate in one bus clock cycle. This enables
the mapping of a direct form FIR filter that approaches a
computation rate of one FIR tap for each clock cycle. The MCU
can implement any of the functions performed by this block, but
at a slower rate that consumes MCU bandwidth.
The heart of the DFB is a datapath (DP), which is the numerical
calculation unit of the DFB. The DP is a 24-bit fixed-point
numerical processor containing a 48-bit multiply and accumulate
function (MAC), a multi-function ALU, sample and coefficient
data RAMs as well as data routing, shifting, holding and rounding
functions.
In the MAC, two 24-bit values can be multiplied and the result
added to the 48-bit accumulator in each bus clock cycle. The
MAC is the only portion of the DP that is wider than 24 bits. All
results from the MAC are passed on to the ALU as 24-bit values
representing the high-order 24 bits in the accumulator shifted by
one (bits 46:23). The MAC assumes an implied binary point after
the most significant bit.
The DP also contains an optimized ALU that supports add,
subtract, comparison, threshold, absolute value, squelch,
saturation, and other functions. The DP unit is controlled by
seven control fields totaling 18 bits coming from the DFB
Controller. For more information see the TRM.
The PSoC Creator interface provides a wizard to implement FIR
and IIR digital filters with coefficients for LPF, BPF, HPF, Notch
and arbitrary shape filters. 64 pairs of data and coefficients are
stored. This enables a 64 tap FIR filter or up to 4 16 tap filters of
either FIR or IIR formulation.
Figure 7-23. DFB Application Diagram (pwr/gnd not shown)
The typical use model is for data to be supplied to the DFB over
the system bus from another on-chip system data source such
as an ADC. The data typically passes through main memory or
is directly transferred from another chip resource through DMA.
The DFB processes this data and passes the result to another
on chip resource such as a DAC or main memory through DMA
on the system bus.
Data movement in or out of the DFB is typically controlled by the
system DMA controller but can be moved directly by the MCU.
8. Analog Subsystem
The analog programmable system creates application specific
combinations of both standard and advanced analog signal
processing blocks. These blocks are then interconnected to
each other and also to any pin on the device, providing a high
level of design flexibility and IP security. The features of the
analog subsystem are outlined here to provide an overview of
capabilities and architecture.
Flexible, configurable analog routing architecture provided by
analog globals, analog mux bus, and analog local buses.
High resolution Delta-Sigma ADC.
Up to four 8-bit DACs that provide either voltage or current
output.
Four comparators with optional connection to configurable LUT
outputs.
Up to four configurable switched capacitor/continuous time
(SC/CT) blocks for functions that include opamp, unity gain
buffer, programmable gain amplifier, transimpedance amplifier,
and mixer.
Up to four opamps for internal use and connection to GPIO that
can be used as high current output buffers.
CapSense subsystem to enable capacitive touch sensing.
Precision reference for generating an accurate analog voltage
for internal analog blocks.
BUSCLK
read_data
Data
Source
(PHUB)
write_data
Digital
Routing
Digital Filter
Block
addr
System
Bus
Data
Dest
(PHUB)
DMA
Request
DMA
CTRL
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 53 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 8-1. Analog Subsystem Block Diagram
DAC
DelSig
ADC
DAC
A
N
A
L
O
G
DAC
SC/CT Block
SC/CT Block
SC/CT Block
Comparators
CMP
CMP
CMP
Op
Amp
SC/CT Block
GPIO
Port
R
O
U
T
I
N
G
Op
Amp
Op
Amp
R
O
U
T
I
N
G
Precision
Reference
DAC
Op
Amp
GPIO
Port
A
N
A
L
O
G
CMP
CapSense Subsystem
Analog
Interface
DSI
Array
Clock
Distribution
The PSoC Creator software program provides a user friendly
interface to configure the analog connections between the GPIO
and various analog resources and connections from one analog
resource to another. PSoC Creator also provides component
libraries that allow you to configure the various analog blocks to
perform application specific functions (PGA, transimpedance
amplifier, voltage DAC, current DAC, and so on). The tool also
generates API interface libraries that allow you to write firmware
that allows the communication between the analog peripheral
and CPU/Memory.
8.1 Analog Routing
The CY8C36 family of devices has a flexible analog routing
architecture that provides the capability to connect GPIOs and
different analog blocks, and also route signals between different
analog blocks. One of the strong points of this flexible routing
architecture is that it allows dynamic routing of input and output
connections to the different analog blocks.
For information on how to make pin selections for optimal analog
routing, refer to the application note, AN58304 - PSoC® 3 and
PSoC® 5 - Pin Selection for Analog Designs.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Config &
Status
Registers
PHUB
CPU
Decimator
8.1.1 Features
Flexible, configurable analog routing architecture
16 analog globals (AG) and two analog mux buses
(AMUXBUS) to connect GPIOs and the analog blocks
Each GPIO is connected to one analog global and one analog
mux bus
Eight analog local buses (abus) to route signals between the
different analog blocks
Multiplexers and switches for input and output selection of the
analog blocks
8.1.2 Functional Description
Analog globals (AGs) and analog mux buses (AMUXBUS)
provide analog connectivity between GPIOs and the various
analog blocks. There are 16 AGs in the CY8C36 family. The
analog routing architecture is divided into four quadrants as
shown in Figure 8-2. Each quadrant has four analog globals
(AGL[0..3], AGL[4..7], AGR[0..3], AGR[4..7]). Each GPIO is
connected to the corresponding AG through an analog switch.
The analog mux bus is a shared routing resource that connects
to every GPIO through an analog switch. There are two
AMUXBUS routes in CY8C36, one in the left half (AMUXBUSL)
and one in the right half (AMUXBUSR), as shown in Figure 8-2.
Page 54 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 8-2. CY8C36 Analog Interconnect
*
*
*
ExVrefL2
opamp2
swinp
01 2 3 4 56 7 0123
3210 76543210
*
opamp1
swfol
swfol
GPIO
P3[5]
GPIO
swinp P3[4]
GPIO
swinn P3[3]
GPIO
P3[2]
GPIO
P3[1]
GPIO
P3[0]
GPXT
* P15[1]
GPXT
* P15[0]
swinn
swfol
swfol
opamp3
swinn
*
refbufl_
cmp
+
- comp2
bg_vda_swabusl0
CAPSENSE
out
ref
in refbufl
refbuf_vref1 (1.024V)
refbuf_vref2 (1.2V)
refsel[1:0]
sc0
Vin
Vref
out
vssa
sc0_bgref
(1.024V)
sc2_bgref
(1.024V)
refbuf_vref1 (1.024V)
refbuf_vref2 (1.2V)
refsel[1:0]
sc1
Vin
Vref
out
SC/CT
Vin
Vref
out
sc2
out
ref
in
Vssa
sc1_bgref
(1.024V)
sc3_bgref
(1.024V)
Vin
Vref
out
sc3
ABUSL0
ABUSL1
ABUSL2
ABUSL3
v0
DAC0
i0
DAC1
v1
i1
v2
DAC2
i2
DAC3
v3
i3
VIDAC
vssd
dsm0_vcm_vref1 (0.8V)
dsm0_vcm_vref2 (0.7V)
+
DSM0
-
vssa
USB IO
USB IO
* P15[6]
GPIO
P5[7]
GPIO
P5[6]
GPIO
P5[5]
GPIO
P5[4]
SIO
P12[7]
SIO
P12[6]
GPIO
* P1[7]
GPIO
* P1[6]
DSM
vcm
refs
qtz_ref
vref_vss_ext
dsm0_qtz_vref2 (1.2V)
dsm0_qtz_vref1 (1.024V)
Vdda/3
Vdda/4
ExVrefL
ExVrefR
refmux[2:0]
01 23 456 7 0123
3210 76543210
*
Vbat
Vssd
Ind
Vssb
Vboost
*
*
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
*
Large ( ~200 Ohms)
*
Switch Resistance
Small ( ~870 Ohms )
GPIO
P5[0]
GPIO
P5[1]
GPIO
P5[2]
GPIO
P5[3]
GPIO
P1[0]
GPIO
P1[1]
GPIO
P1[2]
GPIO
P1[3]
GPIO
P1[4]
GPIO
P1[5]
GPIO
P2[5]
GPIO
P2[6]
GPIO
P2[7]
SIO
P12[4]
SIO
P12[5]
GPIO
P6[4]
GPIO
P6[5]
GPIO
P6[6]
GPIO
P6[7]
*
*
Connection
*
XRES
*
AMUXBUSL
*
AGR[3]
AGR[2]
AGR[1]
AGR[0]
AMUXBUSR
Notes:
* Denotes pins on all packages
LCD signals are not shown.
Vddio1
AGL[3]
AGL[2]
AGL[1]
AGL[0]
Mux Group
Switch Group
AGR[0]
LPF
AMUXBUSR
AGR[3]
AGR[2]
AGR[1]
VBE
Vss ref
*
TS
ADC
AMUXBUSR
ANALOG ANALOG
BUS
GLOBALS
*
:
AGL[1]
AGL[2]
AGL[3]
AMUXBUSL
AGL[0]
ANALOG ANALOG
GLOBALS
BUS
*
AMUXBUSL
Vssd
Vddd
* P15[7]
dac_vref (0.256V)
vcmsel[1:0]
Vccd
ABUSR0
ABUSR1
ABUSR2
ABUSR3
*
*
Vddio2
refbufr
*
*
Vddd
GPIO
P6[0]
GPIO
P6[1]
GPIO
P6[2]
GPIO
P6[3]
GPIO
P15[4]
GPIO
P15[5]
GPIO
P2[0]
GPIO
P2[1]
GPIO
P2[2]
GPIO
P2[3] *
GPIO
P2[4] *
i1
*
*
Vssd
+
-
i3
cmp0_vref
(1.024V)
cmp1_vref
Vdda
Vdda/2
Vccd
comp3
ExVrefR
AGR[4]
AMUXBUSR
vref_cmp1
(0.256V)
comp1 +
-
COMPARATOR
cmp_muxvn[1:0]
bg_vda_res_en
abuf_vref_int
(1.024V)
swin
AGR[7]
AGR[6]
AGR[5]
GPIO
P4[2]
GPIO
P4[3]
GPIO
P4[4]
GPIO
P4[5]
GPIO
P4[6]
GPIO
P4[7]
swout
out1
comp0
+
-
cmp1_vref
cmp0_vref
(1.024V)
in1
out0
swin
i2
*
LPF
in0
swout
abuf_vref_int
(1.024V)
refbufr_
cmp
i0
cmp1_vref
*
*
*
opamp0
*
*
AGL[6]
AGL[7]
AGR[4]
AGR[5]
AGR[6]
AGR[7]
*
*
*
*
AGL[4]
AGL[5]
*
*
*
ExVrefL
ExVrefL1
*
*
*
AMUXBUSR
AMUXBUSL
AGL[4]
AGL[5]
AGL[6]
AGL[7]
Vddio3
GPIO
P3[6]
GPIO
P3[7]
SIO
P12[0]
SIO
P12[1]
GPIO
P15[2]
GPIO
P15[3]
AMUXBUSL
Vssd
swinp
swinp
GPIO
P0[4]
GPIO
P0[5]
GPIO
P0[6]
GPIO
P0[7]
Vcca
Vssa
Vdda
SIO
P12[2]
SIO
P12[3]
GPIO
P4[0]
GPIO
P4[1]
GPIO
P0[0]
GPIO
P0[1]
GPIO
P0[2]
GPIO
P0[3]
Vddio0
swinn
Rev #60
13-Feb-2012
Page 55 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Analog local buses (abus) are routing resources located within
the analog subsystem and are used to route signals between
different analog blocks. There are eight abus routes in CY8C36,
four in the left half (abusl [0:3]) and four in the right half (abusr
[0:3]) as shown in Figure 8-2. Using the abus saves the analog
globals and analog mux buses from being used for
interconnecting the analog blocks.
Multiplexers and switches exist on the various buses to direct
signals into and out of the analog blocks. A multiplexer can have
only one connection on at a time, whereas a switch can have
multiple connections on simultaneously. In Figure 8-2,
multiplexers are indicated by grayed ovals and switches are
indicated by transparent ovals.
actual analog to digital conversion. The modulator over-samples
the input and generates a serial data stream output. This high
speed data stream is not useful for most applications without
some type of post processing, and so is passed to the decimator
through the Analog Interface block. The decimator converts the
high speed serial data stream into parallel ADC results. The
modulator/decimator frequency response is [(sin x)/x]4; a typical
frequency response is shown in Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-4. Delta-sigma ADC Block Diagram
Positive
Input Mux
Input
Buffer
(Analog Routing)
8.2 Delta-sigma ADC
The CY8C36 device contains one delta-sigma ADC. This ADC
offers differential input, high resolution and excellent linearity,
making it a good ADC choice for measurement applications. The
converter can be configured to output 12-bit resolution at data
rates of up to 192 ksps. At a fixed clock rate, resolution can be
traded for faster data rates as shown in Table 8-1 and Figure 8-3.
Negative
Input Mux
Delta
Sigma
Modulator
Decimator
12 to 20 Bit
Result
EOC
SOC
Figure 8-5. Delta-sigma ADC Frequency Response,
Normalized to Output, Sample Rate = 48 kHz
Table 8-1. Delta-sigma ADC Performance
0
Bits
Maximum Sample Rate
(sps)
SINAD (dB)
12
192 k
66
-20
8
384 k
43
-30
Figure 8-3. Delta-sigma ADC Sample Rates, Range = ±1.024 V
1,000,000
frequency Response. dB
-10
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
100,000
100
1,000
10,000
100,000
1,000,000
Input Frequency, Hz
Sample rates, sps
Input frequency, Hz
Resolution and sample rate are controlled by the Decimator.
Data is pipelined in the decimator; the output is a function of the
last four samples. When the input multiplexer is switched, the
output data is not valid until after the fourth sample after the
switch.
10,000
8.2.2 Operational Modes
1,000
Continuous
Multi-Sample
100
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Resolution, bits
The ADC can be configured by the user to operate in one of four
modes: Single Sample, Multi Sample, Continuous, or Multi
Sample (Turbo). All four modes are started by either a write to
the start bit in a control register or an assertion of the Start of
Conversion (SoC) signal. When the conversion is complete, a
status bit is set and the output signal End of Conversion (EoC)
asserts high and remains high until the value is read by either the
DMA controller or the CPU.
8.2.1 Functional Description
8.2.2.1 Single Sample
The ADC connects and configures three basic components,
input buffer, delta-sigma modulator, and decimator. The basic
block diagram is shown in Figure 8-4. The signal from the input
muxes is delivered to the delta-sigma modulator either directly or
through the input buffer. The delta-sigma modulator performs the
In Single Sample mode, the ADC performs one sample
conversion on a trigger. In this mode, the ADC stays in standby
state waiting for the SoC signal to be asserted. When SoC is
signaled the ADC performs four successive conversions. The
first three conversions prime the decimator. The ADC result is
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 56 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
hardware. This signal is optional and does not need to be
connected if ADC is running in a continuous mode.
valid and available after the fourth conversion, at which time the
EoC signal is generated. To detect the end of conversion, the
system may poll a control register for status or configure the
external EoC signal to generate an interrupt or invoke a DMA
request. When the transfer is done the ADC reenters the standby
state where it stays until another SoC event.
8.2.4 End of Conversion Output
The EoC signal goes high at the end of each ADC conversion.
This signal may be used to trigger either an interrupt or DMA
request.
8.2.2.2 Continuous
8.3 Comparators
Continuous sample mode is used to take multiple successive
samples of a single input signal. Multiplexing multiple inputs
should not be done with this mode. There is a latency of three
conversion times before the first conversion result is available.
This is the time required to prime the decimator. After the first
result, successive conversions are available at the selected
sample rate.
The CY8C36 family of devices contains four comparators in a
device. Comparators have these features:
Input offset factory trimmed to less than 5 mV
Rail-to-rail common mode input range (VSSA to VDDA)
Speed and power can be traded off by using one of three
8.2.2.3 Multi Sample
modes: fast, slow, or ultra low-power
Multi sample mode is similar to continuous mode except that the
ADC is reset between samples. This mode is useful when the
input is switched between multiple signals. The decimator is
re-primed between each sample so that previous samples do not
affect the current conversion. Upon completion of a sample, the
next sample is automatically initiated. The results can be
transferred using either firmware polling, interrupt, or DMA.
Comparator outputs can be routed to lookup tables to perform
simple logic functions and then can also be routed to digital
blocks
The positive input of the comparators may be optionally passed
through a low pass filter. Two filters are provided
Comparator inputs can be connections to GPIO, DAC outputs
and SC block outputs
More information on output formats is provided in the Technical
Reference Manual.
8.3.1 Input and Output Interface
The positive and negative inputs to the comparators come from
the analog global buses, the analog mux line, the analog local
bus and precision reference through multiplexers. The output
from each comparator could be routed to any of the two input
LUTs. The output of that LUT is routed to the UDB Digital System
Interface.
8.2.3 Start of Conversion Input
The SoC signal is used to start an ADC conversion. A digital
clock or UDB output can be used to drive this input. It can be
used when the sampling period must be longer than the ADC
conversion time or when the ADC must be synchronized to other
Figure 8-6. Analog Comparator
From
Analog
Routing
From
Analog
Routing
ANAIF
+
comp0
_
+
comp1
_
+
_
comp3
+
_
From
Analog
Routing
From
Analog
Routing
comp2
4
4
LUT0
4
4
4
LUT1
4
LUT2
4
4
LUT3
UDBs
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 57 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
8.3.2 LUT
Figure 8-8. Opamp Configurations
The CY8C36 family of devices contains four LUTs. The LUT is a
two input, one output lookup table that is driven by any one or
two of the comparators in the chip. The output of any LUT is
routed to the digital system interface of the UDB array. From the
digital system interface of the UDB array, these signals can be
connected to UDBs, DMA controller, I/O, or the interrupt
controller.
The LUT control word written to a register sets the logic function
on the output. The available LUT functions and the associated
control word is shown in Table 8-2.
Table 8-2. LUT Function vs. Program Word and Inputs
Control Word
Output (A and B are LUT inputs)
0000b
FALSE (‘0’)
0001b
A AND B
0010b
A AND (NOT B)
0011b
A
0100b
(NOT A) AND B
0101b
B
0110b
A XOR B
0111b
A OR B
1000b
A NOR B
1001b
A XNOR B
1010b
NOT B
1011b
A OR (NOT B)
1100b
NOT A
1101b
(NOT A) OR B
1110b
A NAND B
1111b
TRUE (‘1’)
Vout to Pin
Vin
b) External Uncommitted
Opamp
Opamp
Vout to GPIO
Vp to GPIO
Vn to GPIO
Vn
To Internal Signals
Opamp
Vout to Pin
Vp
GPIO Pin
The CY8C36 family of devices contain up to four general
purpose opamps in a device.
Figure 8-7. Opamp
GPIO
The opamp has three speed modes, slow, medium, and fast. The
slow mode consumes the least amount of quiescent power and
the fast mode consumes the most power. The inputs are able to
swing rail-to-rail. The output swing is capable of rail-to-rail
operation at low current output, within 50 mV of the rails. When
driving high current loads (about 25 mA) the output voltage may
only get within 500 mV of the rails.
8.5 Programmable SC/CT Blocks
Analog
Global Bus
GPIO
Opamp
c) Internal Uncommitted
Opamp
8.4 Opamps
Analog
Global Bus
VREF
Analog
Internal Bus
a) Voltage Follower
Opamp
GPIO
=
Analog Switch
The opamp is uncommitted and can be configured as a gain
stage or voltage follower, or output buffer on external or internal
signals.
See Figure 8-8. In any configuration, the input and output signals
can all be connected to the internal global signals and monitored
with an ADC, or comparator. The configurations are
implemented with switches between the signals and GPIO pins.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
The CY8C36 family of devices contains up to four switched
capacitor/continuous time (SC/CT) blocks in a device. Each
switched capacitor/continuous time block is built around a single
rail-to-rail high bandwidth opamp.
Switched capacitor is a circuit design technique that uses
capacitors plus switches instead of resistors to create analog
functions. These circuits work by moving charge between
capacitors by opening and closing different switches.
Nonoverlapping in phase clock signals control the switches, so
that not all switches are ON simultaneously.
The PSoC Creator tool offers a user friendly interface, which
allows you to easily program the SC/CT blocks. Switch control
and clock phase control configuration is done by PSoC Creator
so users only need to determine the application use parameters
such as gain, amplifier polarity, VREF connection, and so on.
Page 58 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
The same opamps and block interfaces are also connectable to
an array of resistors which allows the construction of a variety of
continuous time functions.
The opamp and resistor array is programmable to perform
various analog functions including
Naked operational amplifier – Continuous mode
Unity-gain buffer – Continuous mode
Programmable gain amplifier (PGA) – Continuous mode
Transimpedance amplifier (TIA) – Continuous mode
Up/down mixer – Continuous mode
Sample and hold mixer (NRZ S/H) – Switched cap mode
First order analog to digital modulator – Switched cap mode
8.5.1 Naked Opamp
The Naked Opamp presents both inputs and the output for
connection to internal or external signals. The opamp has a unity
gain bandwidth greater than 6.0 MHz and output drive current up
to 650 µA. This is sufficient for buffering internal signals (such as
DAC outputs) and driving external loads greater than 7.5 k.
The PGA is used in applications where the input signal may not
be large enough to achieve the desired resolution in the ADC, or
dynamic range of another SC/CT block such as a mixer. The gain
is adjustable at runtime, including changing the gain of the PGA
prior to each ADC sample.
8.5.4 TIA
The Transimpedance Amplifier (TIA) converts an internal or
external current to an output voltage. The TIA uses an internal
feedback resistor in a continuous time configuration to convert
input current to output voltage. For an input current Iin, the output
voltage is VREF - Iin x Rfb, where VREF is the value placed on the
non inverting input. The feedback resistor Rfb is programmable
between 20 K and 1 M through a configuration register.
Table 8-4 shows the possible values of Rfb and associated
configuration settings.
Table 8-4. Feedback Resistor Settings
Configuration Word
Nominal Rfb (K)
000b
20
8.5.2 Unity Gain
001b
30
The Unity Gain buffer is a Naked Opamp with the output directly
connected to the inverting input for a gain of 1.00. It has a –3 dB
bandwidth greater than 6.0 MHz.
010b
40
8.5.3 PGA
101b
250
110b
500
111b
1000
The PGA amplifies an external or internal signal. The PGA can
be configured to operate in inverting mode or noninverting mode.
The PGA function may be configured for both positive and
negative gains as high as 50 and 49 respectively. The gain is
adjusted by changing the values of R1 and R2 as illustrated in
Figure 8-9 on page 59. The schematic in Figure 8-9 on page 59
shows the configuration and possible resistor settings for the
PGA. The gain is switched from inverting and non inverting by
changing the shared select value of the both the input muxes.
The bandwidth for each gain case is listed in Table 8-3.
Gain
Bandwidth
1
6.0 MHz
24
340 kHz
48
220 kHz
50
215 kHz
Vref
1
0
Vin
1
R fb
R1
20 k or 40 k
V out
The TIA configuration is used for applications where an external
sensor's output is current as a function of some type of stimulus
such as temperature, light, magnetic flux etc. In a common
application, the voltage DAC output can be connected to the
VREF TIA input to allow calibration of the external sensor bias
current by adjusting the voltage DAC output voltage.
R2
20 k to 980 k
S
Vref
Figure 8-10. Continuous Time TIA Schematic
V ref
Figure 8-9. PGA Resistor Settings
0
60
120
I in
Table 8-3. Bandwidth
Vin
011b
100b
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
8.6 LCD Direct Drive
The PSoC Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) driver system is a highly
configurable peripheral designed to allow PSoC to directly drive
a broad range of LCD glass. All voltages are generated on chip,
eliminating the need for external components. With a high
multiplex ratio of up to 1/16, the CY8C36 family LCD driver
system can drive a maximum of 736 segments. The PSoC LCD
driver module was also designed with the conservative power
budget of portable devices in mind, enabling different LCD drive
modes and power down modes to conserve power.
Page 59 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
PSoC Creator provides an LCD segment drive component. The
component wizard provides easy and flexible configuration of
LCD resources. You can specify pins for segments and
commons along with other options. The software configures the
device to meet the required specifications. This is possible
because of the programmability inherent to PSoC devices.
Key features of the PSoC LCD segment system are:
LCD panel direct driving
Type A (standard) and Type B (low-power) waveform support
Wide operating voltage range support (2 V to 5 V) for LCD
panels
Static, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, 1/5 bias voltage levels
Internal bias voltage generation through internal resistor ladder
Up to 62 total common and segment outputs
8.6.2 Display Data Flow
The LCD segment driver system reads display data and
generates the proper output voltages to the LCD glass to
produce the desired image. Display data resides in a memory
buffer in the system SRAM. Each time you need to change the
common and segment driver voltages, the next set of pixel data
moves from the memory buffer into the Port Data Registers
through DMA.
8.6.3 UDB and LCD Segment Control
A UDB is configured to generate the global LCD control signals
and clocking. This set of signals is routed to each LCD pin driver
through a set of dedicated LCD global routing channels. In
addition to generating the global LCD control signals, the UDB
also produces a DMA request to initiate the transfer of the next
frame of LCD data.
8.6.4 LCD DAC
Up to 1/16 multiplex for a maximum of 16 backplane/common
Drives up to 736 total segments (16 backplane × 46 front plane)
The LCD DAC generates the contrast control and bias voltage
for the LCD system. The LCD DAC produces up to five LCD drive
voltages plus ground, based on the selected bias ratio. The bias
voltages are driven out to GPIO pins on a dedicated LCD bias
bus, as required.
Up to 64 levels of software controlled contrast
8.7 CapSense
Ability to move display data from memory buffer to LCD driver
The CapSense system provides a versatile and efficient means
for measuring capacitance in applications such as touch sense
buttons, sliders, proximity detection, etc. The CapSense system
uses a configuration of system resources, including a few
hardware functions primarily targeted for CapSense. Specific
resource usage is detailed in the CapSense component in PSoC
Creator.
outputs
Up to 62 front plane/segment outputs for direct drive
through DMA (without CPU intervention)
Adjustable LCD refresh rate from 10 Hz to 150 Hz
Ability to invert LCD display for negative image
Three LCD driver drive modes, allowing power optimization
Figure 8-11. LCD System
A capacitive sensing method using a Delta-Sigma Modulator
(CSD) is used. It provides capacitance sensing using a switched
capacitor technique with a delta-sigma modulator to convert the
sensing current to a digital code.
LCD
DAC
Global
Clock
8.8 Temp Sensor
UDB
LCD Driver
Block
DMA
PIN
Display
RAM
Die temperature is used to establish programming parameters
for writing flash. Die temperature is measured using a dedicated
sensor based on a forward biased transistor. The temperature
sensor has its own auxiliary ADC.
8.9 DAC
PHUB
8.6.1 LCD Segment Pin Driver
Each GPIO pin contains an LCD driver circuit. The LCD driver
buffers the appropriate output of the LCD DAC to directly drive
the glass of the LCD. A register setting determines whether the
pin is a common or segment. The pin’s LCD driver then selects
one of the six bias voltages to drive the I/O pin, as appropriate
for the display data.
The CY8C36 parts contain up to four Digital to Analog
Convertors (DACs). Each DAC is 8-bit and can be configured for
either voltage or current output. The DACs support CapSense,
power supply regulation, and waveform generation. Each DAC
has the following features:
Adjustable voltage or current output in 255 steps
Programmable step size (range selection)
Eight bits of calibration to correct ± 25% of gain error
Source and sink option for current output
High and low speed / power modes
8 Msps conversion rate for current output
1 Msps conversion rate for voltage output
Monotonic in nature
Data and strobe inputs can be provided by the CPU or DMA,
or routed directly from the DSI
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 60 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Dedicated low-resistance output pin for high-current mode
Figure 8-12. DAC Block Diagram
I
Reference Source source Range 1x , 8x , 64x
Vout Scaler R Iout 3R I sink Range 1x , 8x , 64x 8.9.1 Current DAC
The current DAC (IDAC) can be configured for the ranges 0 to
31.875 µA, 0 to 255 µA, and 0 to 2.04 mA. The IDAC can be
configured to source or sink current.
Continuous time up and down mixing works for applications with
input signals and local oscillator frequencies up to 1 MHz.
Figure 8-13. Mixer Configuration
C2 = 1.7 pF
8.9.2 Voltage DAC
For the voltage DAC (VDAC), the current DAC output is routed
through resistors. The two ranges available for the VDAC are 0
to 1.02 V and 0 to 4.08 V. In voltage mode any load connected
to the output of a DAC should be purely capacitive (the output of
the VDAC is not buffered).
C1 = 850 fF
Rmix 0 20 k or 40 k
8.10 Up/Down Mixer
In continuous time mode, the SC/CT block components are used
to build an up or down mixer. Any mixing application contains an
input signal frequency and a local oscillator frequency. The
polarity of the clock, Fclk, switches the amplifier between
inverting or noninverting gain. The output is the product of the
input and the switching function from the local oscillator, with
frequency components at the local oscillator plus and minus the
signal frequency (Fclk + Fin and Fclk – Fin) and reduced-level
frequency components at odd integer multiples of the local
oscillator frequency. The local oscillator frequency is provided by
the selected clock source for the mixer.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
sc_clk
Rmix 0 20 k or 40 k
Vin
0
Vref
Vout
1
sc_clk
8.11 Sample and Hold
The main application for a sample and hold, is to hold a value
stable while an ADC is performing a conversion. Some
applications require multiple signals to be sampled
simultaneously, such as for power calculations (V and I).
Page 61 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Complete Debug on Chip (DoC) functionality enables full device
debugging in the final system using the standard production
device. It does not require special interfaces, debugging pods,
simulators, or emulators. Only the standard programming
connections are required to fully support debug.
Figure 8-14. Sample and Hold Topology
(1 and 2 are opposite phases of a clock)
1
Vi
C1
C2
1
n
1
2
V ref
V out
2
2
1
2
1
1
V ref
2
C3
C4
2
Vref
8.11.1 Down Mixer
The SC/CT block can be used as a mixer to down convert an
input signal. This circuit is a high bandwidth passive sample
network that can sample input signals up to 14 MHz. This
sampled value is then held using the opamp with a maximum
clock rate of 4 MHz. The output frequency is at the difference
between the input frequency and the highest integer multiple of
the Local Oscillator that is less than the input.
8.11.2 First Order Modulator – SC Mode
A first order modulator is constructed by placing the SC/CT block
in an integrator mode and using a comparator to provide a 1-bit
feedback to the input. Depending on this bit, a reference voltage
is either subtracted or added to the input signal. The block output
is the output of the comparator and not the integrator in the
modulator case. The signal is downshifted and buffered and then
processed by a decimator to make a delta-sigma converter or a
counter to make an incremental converter. The accuracy of the
sampled data from the first-order modulator is determined from
several factors.
The PSoC Creator IDE software provides fully integrated
programming and debug support for PSoC devices. The low cost
MiniProg3 programmer and debugger is designed to provide full
programming and debug support of PSoC devices in conjunction
with the PSoC Creator IDE. PSoC JTAG, SWD, and SWV
interfaces are compatible with industry standard third party tools.
All DOC circuits are disabled by default and can only be enabled
in firmware. If not enabled, the only way to reenable them is to
erase the entire device, clear flash protection, and reprogram the
device with new firmware that enables DOC. Disabling DOC
features, robust flash protection, and hiding custom analog and
digital functionality inside the PSoC device provide a level of
security not possible with multichip application solutions.
Additionally, all device interfaces can be permanently disabled
(Device Security) for applications concerned about phishing
attacks due to a maliciously reprogrammed device. Permanently
disabling interfaces is not recommended in most applications
because the you cannot access the device later. Because all
programming, debug, and test interfaces are disabled when
Device Security is enabled, PSoCs with Device Security enabled
may not be returned for failure analysis.
Table 9-1. Debug Configurations
Debug and Trace Configuration
All debug and trace disabled
GPIO Pins Used
0
JTAG
4 or 5
SWD
2
SWV
1
SWD + SWV
3
9.1 JTAG Interface
The main application for this modulator is for a low frequency
ADC with high accuracy. Applications include strain gauges,
thermocouples, precision voltage, and current measurement.
The IEEE 1149.1 compliant JTAG interface exists on four or five
pins (the nTRST pin is optional). The JTAG interface is used for
programming the flash memory, debugging, I/O scan chains, and
JTAG device chaining.
9. Programming, Debug Interfaces,
Resources
PSoC 3 has certain timing requirements to be met for entering
programming mode through the JTAG interface. Due to these
timing requirements, not all standard JTAG programmers, or
standard JTAG file formats such as SVF or STAPL, can support
PSoC 3 programming. The list of programmers that support
PSoC 3 programming is available at
http://www.cypress.com/go/programming.
PSoC devices include extensive support for programming,
testing, debugging, and tracing both hardware and firmware.
Three interfaces are available: JTAG, SWD, and SWV. JTAG and
SWD support all programming and debug features of the device.
JTAG also supports standard JTAG scan chains for board level
test and chaining multiple JTAG devices to a single JTAG
connection.
For more information on PSoC 3 Programming, refer to the
application note AN62391 - In-System Programming for
PSoC® 3.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
The JTAG clock frequency can be up to 14 MHz, or 1/3 of the
CPU clock frequency for 8 and 16-bit transfers, or 1/5 of the CPU
clock frequency for 32-bit transfers. By default, the JTAG pins are
enabled on new devices but the JTAG interface can be disabled,
allowing these pins to be used as GPIO instead.
Page 62 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 9-1. JTAG Interface Connections between PSoC 3 and Programmer
VDD
Host Programmer
PSoC 3
VDD
VDDD, VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO1, VDDIO2, VDDIO3 1, 2, 3, 4
TCK
TCK (P1[1]
TMS 5
TMS (P1[0]) 5
TDO
TDI (P1[4])
TDI
TDO (P1[3])
nTRST 6
nTRST (P1[5]) 6
XRES
XRES or P1[2] 4, 7
GND
VSSD, VSSA
GND
1
The voltage levels of Host Programmer and the PSoC 3 voltage domains involved in Programming should be same. The
Port 1 JTAG pins, XRES pin (XRES_N or P1[2]) are powered by VDDIO1. So, VDDIO1 of PSoC 3 should be at same voltage
level as host VDD. Rest of PSoC 3 voltage domains ( VDDD, VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO2, VDDIO3) need not be at the same voltage level as
host Programmer.
2
Vdda must be greater than or equal to all other power supplies (Vddd, Vddio’s) in PSoC 3.
3
For Power cycle mode Programming, XRES pin is not required. But the Host programmer must have
the capability to toggle power (Vddd, Vdda, All Vddio’s) to PSoC 3. This may typically require external
interface circuitry to toggle power which will depend on the programming setup. The power supplies can
be brought up in any sequence, however, once stable, VDDA must be greater than or equal to all other
supplies.
4
For JTAG Programming, Device reset can also be done without connecting to the XRES pin or Power cycle mode by
using the TMS,TCK,TDI, TDO pins of PSoC 3, and writing to a specific register. But this requires that the DPS setting in
NVL is not equal to “Debug Ports Disabled”.
5
By default, PSoC 3 is configured for 4-wire JTAG mode unless user changes the DPS setting. So the TMS pin is
unidirectional. But if the DPS setting is changed to non-JTAG mode, the TMS pin in JTAG is bi-directional as the SWD
Protocol has to be used for acquiring the PSoC 3 device initially. After switching from SWD to JTAG mode, the TMS pin
will be uni-directional. In such a case, unidirectional buffer should not be used on TMS line.
6
nTRST JTAG pin (P1[5]) cannot be used to reset the JTAG TAP controlller during first time programming of PSoC 3 as
the default setting is 4-wire JTAG (nTRST disabled). Use the TMS, TCK pins to do a reset of JTAG TAP controller.
7
If XRES pin is used by host, P1[2] will be configured as XRES by default only for 48-pin devices (without dedicated XRES
pin). For devices with dedicated XRES pin, P1[2] is GPIO pin by default. So use P1[2] as Reset pin only for 48-pin
devices, but use dedicated XRES pin for rest of devices.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 63 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
9.2 Serial Wire Debug Interface
The SWD interface is the preferred alternative to the JTAG
interface. It requires only two pins instead of the four or five
needed by JTAG. SWD provides all of the programming and
debugging features of JTAG at the same speed. SWD does not
provide access to scan chains or device chaining. The SWD
clock frequency can be up to 1/3 of the CPU clock frequency.
SWD uses two pins, either two of the JTAG pins (TMS and TCK)
or the USBIO D+ and D– pins. The USBIO pins are useful for in
system programming of USB solutions that would otherwise
require a separate programming connector. One pin is used for
the data clock and the other is used for data input and output.
SWD can be enabled on only one of the pin pairs at a time. This
only happens if, within 8 µs (key window) after reset, that pin pair
(JTAG or USB) receives a predetermined sequence of 1s and 0s.
SWD is used for debugging or for programming the flash
memory.
The SWD interface can be enabled from the JTAG interface or
disabled, allowing its pins to be used as GPIO. Unlike JTAG, the
SWD interface can always be reacquired on any device during
the key window. It can then be used to reenable the JTAG
interface, if desired. When using SWD or JTAG pins as standard
GPIO, make sure that the GPIO functionality and PCB circuits do
not interfere with SWD or JTAG use.
Figure 9-2. SWD Interface Connections between PSoC 3 and Programmer
VDD
Host Programmer
VDDD, VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO1, VDDIO2, VDDIO3 1, 2, 3
VDD
SWDCK
SWDCK (P1[1] or P15[7])
SWDIO
SWDIO (P1[0] or P15[6])
XRES or P1[2] 3, 4
XRES
GND
PSoC 3
GND
VSSD, VSSA
1
The voltage levels of the Host Programmer and the PSoC 3 voltage domains involved in Programming
should be the same. XRES pin (XRES_N or P1[2]) is powered by VDDIO1. The USB SWD pins are
powered by VDDD. So for Programming using the USB SWD pins with XRES pin, the VDDD, VDDIO1 of
PSoC 3 should be at the same voltage level as Host VDD. Rest of PSoC 3 voltage domains ( VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO2, VDDIO3) need not be at the same voltage level as host Programmer. The Port 1 SWD pins are
powered by VDDIO1. So VDDIO1 of PSoC 3 should be at same voltage level as host VDD for Port 1 SWD
programming. Rest of PSoC 3 voltage domains ( VDDD, VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO2, VDDIO3) need not be at the same
voltage level as host Programmer.
2
Vdda must be greater than or equal to all other power supplies (Vddd, Vddio’s) in PSoC 3.
3
For Power cycle mode Programming, XRES pin is not required. But the Host programmer must have
the capability to toggle power (Vddd, Vdda, All Vddio’s) to PSoC 3. This may typically require external
interface circuitry to toggle power which will depend on the programming setup. The power supplies can
be brought up in any sequence, however, once stable, VDDA must be greater than or equal to all other
supplies.
4
P1[2] will be configured as XRES by default only for 48-pin devices (without dedicated XRES pin). For
devices with dedicated XRES pin, P1[2] is GPIO pin by default. So use P1[2] as Reset pin only for 48pin devices, but use dedicated XRES pin for rest of devices.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 64 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
9.3 Debug Features
Using the JTAG or SWD interface, the CY8C36 supports the
following debug features:
verified. You can increase flash protection levels to protect
firmware IP. Flash protection can only be reset after a full device
erase. Individual flash blocks can be erased, programmed, and
verified, if block security settings permit.
Halt and single-step the CPU
9.7 Device Security
View and change CPU and peripheral registers, and RAM
PSoC 3 offers an advanced security feature called device
security, which permanently disables all test, programming, and
debug ports, protecting your application from external access.
The device security is activated by programming a 32-bit key
(0×50536F43) to a Write Once Latch (WOL).
The WOL is a type of nonvolatile latch (NVL). The cell itself is an
NVL with additional logic wrapped around it. Each WOL device
contains four bytes (32 bits) of data. The wrapper outputs a ‘1’ if
a super-majority (28 of 32) of its bits match a pre-determined
pattern (0×50536F43); it outputs a ‘0’ if this majority is not
reached. When the output is 1, the Write Once NV latch locks the
part out of Debug and Test modes; it also permanently gates off
the ability to erase or alter the contents of the latch. Matching all
bits is intentionally not required, so that single (or few) bit failures
do not deassert the WOL output. The state of the NVL bits after
wafer processing is truly random with no tendency toward 1 or 0.
The WOL only locks the part after the correct 32-bit key
(0×50536F43) is loaded into the NVL's volatile memory,
programmed into the NVL's nonvolatile cells, and the part is
reset. The output of the WOL is only sampled on reset and used
to disable the access. This precaution prevents anyone from
reading, erasing, or altering the contents of the internal memory.
The user can write the key into the WOL to lock out external
access only if no flash protection is set (see “Flash Security” on
page 21). However, after setting the values in the WOL, a user
still has access to the part until it is reset. Therefore, a user can
write the key into the WOL, program the flash protection data,
and then reset the part to lock it.
If the device is protected with a WOL setting, Cypress cannot
perform failure analysis and, therefore, cannot accept RMAs
from customers. The WOL can be read out through the SWD port
to electrically identify protected parts. The user can write the key
in WOL to lock out external access only if no flash protection is
set. For more information on how to take full advantage of the
security features in PSoC see the PSoC 3 TRM.
Disclaimer
addresses
Eight program address breakpoints
One memory access breakpoint—break on reading or writing
any memory address and data value
Break on a sequence of breakpoints (non recursive)
Debugging at the full speed of the CPU
Compatible with PSoC Creator and MiniProg3 programmer and
debugger
Standard JTAG programming and debugging interfaces make
CY8C36 compatible with other popular third-party tools (for
example, ARM / Keil)
9.4 Trace Features
The CY8C36 supports the following trace features when using
JTAG or SWD:
Trace the 8051 program counter (PC), accumulator register
(ACC), and one SFR / 8051 core RAM register
Trace depth up to 1000 instructions if all registers are traced,
or 2000 instructions if only the PC is traced (on devices that
include trace memory)
Program address trigger to start tracing
Trace windowing, that is, only trace when the PC is within a
given range
Two modes for handling trace buffer full: continuous (overwriting
the oldest trace data) or break when trace buffer is full
9.5 Single Wire Viewer Interface
The SWV interface is closely associated with SWD but can also
be used independently. SWV data is output on the JTAG
interface’s TDO pin. If using SWV, you must configure the device
for SWD, not JTAG. SWV is not supported with the JTAG
interface.
SWV is ideal for application debug where it is helpful for the
firmware to output data similar to 'printf' debugging on PCs. The
SWV is ideal for data monitoring, because it requires only a
single pin and can output data in standard UART format or
Manchester encoded format. For example, it can be used to tune
a PID control loop in which the output and graphing of the three
error terms greatly simplifies coefficient tuning.
The following features are supported in SWV:
32 virtual channels, each 32 bits long
Simple, efficient packing and serializing protocol
Supports standard UART format (N81)
9.6 Programming Features
Note the following details of the flash code protection features on
Cypress devices.
Cypress products meet the specifications contained in their
particular Cypress data sheets. Cypress believes that its family
of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the
market today, regardless of how they are used. There may be
methods, unknown to Cypress, that can breach the code
protection features. Any of these methods, to our knowledge,
would be dishonest and possibly illegal. Neither Cypress nor any
other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of
their code. Code protection does not mean that we are
guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.”
Cypress is willing to work with the customer who is concerned
about the integrity of their code. Code protection is constantly
evolving. We at Cypress are committed to continuously
improving the code protection features of our products.
The JTAG and SWD interfaces provide full programming
support. The entire device can be erased, programmed, and
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 65 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
10. Development Support
The CY8C36 family has a rich set of documentation,
development tools, and online resources to assist you during
your development process. Visit
psoc.cypress.com/getting-started to find out more.
10.1 Documentation
A suite of documentation, supports the CY8C36 family to ensure
that you can find answers to your questions quickly. This section
contains a list of some of the key documents.
Software User Guide: A step-by-step guide for using PSoC
Creator. The software user guide shows you how the PSoC
Creator build process works in detail, how to use source control
with PSoC Creator, and much more.
Component data sheets: The flexibility of PSoC allows the
creation of new peripherals (components) long after the device
has gone into production. Component data sheets provide all of
the information needed to select and use a particular component,
including a functional description, API documentation, example
code, and AC/DC specifications.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Application Notes: PSoC application notes discuss a particular
application of PSoC in depth; examples include brushless DC
motor control and on-chip filtering. Application notes often
include example projects in addition to the application note
document.
Technical Reference Manual: The Technical Reference Manual
(TRM) contains all the technical detail you need to use a PSoC
device, including a complete description of all PSoC registers.
10.2 Online
In addition to print documentation, the Cypress PSoC forums
connect you with fellow PSoC users and experts in PSoC from
around the world, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
10.3 Tools
With industry standard cores, programming, and debugging
interfaces, the CY8C36 family is part of a development tool
ecosystem. Visit us at www.cypress.com/go/psoccreator for the
latest information on the revolutionary, easy to use PSoC Creator
IDE, supported third party compilers, programmers, debuggers,
and development kits.
Page 66 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11. Electrical Specifications
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,
except where noted. The unique flexibility of the PSoC UDBs and analog blocks enable many functions to be implemented in PSoC
Creator components, see the component data sheets for full AC/DC specifications of individual functions. See the “Example
Peripherals” section on page 41 for further explanation of PSoC Creator components.
11.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 11-1. Absolute Maximum Ratings DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Higher storage temperatures
reduce NVL data retention time.
Recommended storage temperature is +25 °C ±25 °C. Extended
duration storage temperatures
above 85 °C degrade reliability.
–55
25
100
°C
Analog supply voltage relative to
VSSA
–0.5
–
6
V
VDDD
Digital supply voltage relative to
VSSD
–0.5
–
6
V
VDDIO
I/O supply voltage relative to VSSD
–0.5
–
6
V
VCCA
Direct analog core voltage input
–0.5
–
1.95
V
VCCD
Direct digital core voltage input
–0.5
–
1.95
V
VSSA
Analog ground voltage
VSSD – 0.5
–
VSSD +
0.5
V
VGPIO[21]
DC input voltage on GPIO
Includes signals sourced by VDDA
and routed internal to the pin
VSSD – 0.5
–
VDDIO +
0.5
V
VSIO
DC input voltage on SIO
Output disabled
VSSD – 0.5
–
7
V
Output enabled
VSSD – 0.5
–
6
V
TSTG
Storage temperature
VDDA
VIND
Voltage at boost converter input
VBAT
Boost converter supply
0.5
–
5.5
V
VSSD – 0.5
–
5.5
V
IVDDIO
Current per VDDIO supply pin
–
–
100
mA
IGPIO
GPIO current
–30
–
41
mA
ISIO
SIO current
–49
–
28
mA
IUSBIO
USBIO current
–56
–
59
mA
VEXTREF
ADC external reference inputs
LU
Latch up current[22]
ESDHBM
Electrostatic discharge voltage,
Human body model
ESDCDM
Electrostatic discharge voltage,
Charge device model
Pins P0[3], P3[2]
–
–
2
V
–140
–
140
mA
VSSA tied to VSSD
2200
–
–
V
VSSA not tied to VSSD
750
–
–
V
500
–
–
V
Note Usage above the absolute maximum conditions listed in Table 11-1 may cause permanent damage to the device. Exposure to
maximum conditions for extended periods of time may affect device reliability. When used below maximum conditions but above
normal operating conditions the device may not operate to specification.
Notes
21. The VDDIO supply voltage must be greater than the maximum voltage on the associated GPIO pins. Maximum voltage on GPIO pin VDDIO VDDA.
22. Meets or exceeds JEDEC Spec EIA/JESD78 IC Latch-up Test.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 67 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.2 Device Level Specifications
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,
except where noted.
11.2.1 Device Level Specifications
Table 11-2. DC Specifications
Parameter
IDD
[23][24]
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ[25] Max
Units
Active Mode
Only IMO and CPU clock enabled. CPU executing VDDX = 2.7 V – 5.5 V; T = –40 °C
simple loop from instruction buffer.
FCPU = 6 MHz
T = 25 °C
–
1.2
2.9
–
1.2
3.1
T = 85 °C
–
4.9
7.7
VDDX = 2.7 V – 5.5 V; T = –40 °C
FCPU = 3 MHz
T = 25 °C
–
1.3
2.9
–
1.6
3.2
IMO enabled, bus clock and CPU clock enabled.
CPU executing complex program from flash.
T = 85 °C
–
4.8
7.5
VDDX = 2.7 V – 5.5 V; T = –40 °C
FCPU = 6 MHz
T = 25 °C
–
2.1
3.7
–
2.3
3.9
T = 85 °C
–
5.6
8.5
VDDX = 2.7 V – 5.5 V; T = –40 °C
FCPU = 12 MHz
T = 25 °C
–
3.5
5.2
–
3.8
5.5
T = 85 °C
–
7.1
9.8
VDDX = 2.7 V – 5.5 V; T = –40 °C
FCPU = 24 MHz
T = 25 °C
–
6.3
8.1
–
6.6
8.3
T = 85 °C
–
10
13
VDDX = 2.7 V – 5.5 V; T = –40 °C
FCPU = 48 MHz
T = 25 °C
–
11.5
13.5
–
12
14
T = 85 °C
–
15.5
18.5
VDDX = 2.7 V – 5.5 V; T = –40 °C
FCPU = 62 MHz
T = 25 °C
–
16
18
–
16
18
T = 85 °C
–
19.5
23
mA
Notes
23. Total current for all power domains: digital (IDDD), analog (IDDA), and I/Os (IDDIO0, 1, 2, 3). Boost not included. All I/Os floating.
24. The current consumption of additional peripherals that are implemented only in programmed logic blocks can be found in their respective datasheets, available in
PSoC Creator, the integrated design environment. To estimate total current, find the CPU current at the frequency of interest and add peripheral currents for your
particular system from the device datasheet and component datasheets.
25. VDDX = 3.3 V.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 68 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 11-2. DC Specifications (continued)
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ[25] Max
Units
[26]
Sleep Mode
CPU = OFF
RTC = ON (= ECO32K ON, in low-power mode)
Sleep timer = ON (= ILO ON at 1 kHz)[27]
WDT = OFF
I2C Wake = OFF
Comparator = OFF
POR = ON
Boost = OFF
SIO pins in single ended input, unregulated output
mode
VDD = VDDIO =
4.5 V - 5.5 V
–
1.1
2.3
T = 25 °C
–
1.1
2.2
T = 85 °C
–
15
30
T = –40 °C
–
1
2.2
T = 25 °C
–
1
2.1
T = 85 °C
–
12
28
T = 25 °C
–
2.2
4.2
VDD = VDDIO =
Comparator = ON
2.7 V – 3.6 V
CPU = OFF
RTC = OFF
Sleep timer = OFF
WDT = OFF
I2C Wake = OFF
POR = ON
Boost = OFF
SIO pins in single ended input, unregulated output
mode
T = 25 °C
–
2.2
2.7
VDD = VDDIO =
I2C Wake = ON
CPU = OFF
2.7 V – 3.6 V
RTC = OFF
Sleep timer = OFF
WDT = OFF
Comparator = OFF
POR = ON
Boost = OFF
SIO pins in single ended input, unregulated output
mode
T = 25 °C
–
2.2
2.8
VDD = VDDIO =
4.5 V - 5.5 V
T = –40 °C
–
0.2
0.6
T = 25 °C
–
0.5
0.6
T = 85 °C
–
4.1
5.3
VDD = VDDIO =
2.7 V – 3.6 V
T = –40 °C
–
0.2
0.6
T = 25 °C
–
0.2
0.4
T = 85 °C
–
3.2
4.2
T = –40 °C
–
0.2
0.6
T = 25 °C
–
0.3
0.4
T = 85 °C
–
3.3
4.3
VDD = VDDIO =
2.7 V – 3.6 V
VDD = VDDIO =
1.71 V – 1.95 V[28]
T = –40 °C
µA
Hibernate Mode[26]
Hibernate mode current
All regulators and oscillators off
SRAM retention
GPIO interrupts are active
Boost = OFF
SIO pins in single ended input, unregulated output
mode
VDD = VDDIO =
1.71 V – 1.95 V[28]
µA
Notes
26. If VCCD and VCCA are externally regulated, the voltage difference between VCCD and VCCA must be less than 50 mV.
27. Sleep timer generates periodic interrupts to wake up the CPU. This specification applies only to those times that the CPU is off.
28. Externally regulated mode.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 69 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 11-1. Active Mode Current vs FCPU, VDD = 3.3 V,
Temperature = 25 °C
Figure 11-2. Active Mode Current vs Temperature and FCPU,
VDD = 3.3 V
Figure 11-3. Active Mode Current vs VDD and Temperature,
FCPU = 24 MHz
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 70 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 11-3. AC Specifications[29]
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
FCPU
CPU frequency
1.71 V VDDD 5.5 V
DC
–
67.01
MHz
FBUSCLK
Bus frequency
1.71 V VDDD 5.5 V
DC
–
67.01
MHz
Svdd
VDD ramp rate
–
–
0.066
V/µs
TIO_INIT
Time from VDDD/VDDA/VCCD/VCCA
IPOR to I/O ports set to their reset
states
–
–
10
µs
TSTARTUP
Time from VDDD/VDDA/VCCD/VCCA VCCA/VDDA = regulated from
PRES to CPU executing code at VDDA/VDDD, no PLL used, fast IMO
reset vector
boot mode (48 MHz typ.)
–
–
33
µs
–
–
66
µs
VCCA/VCCD = regulated from
VDDA/VDDD, no PLL used, slow
IMO boot mode (12 MHz typ.)
TSLEEP
Wakeup from sleep mode –
Application of non–LVD interrupt to
beginning of execution of next CPU
instruction
–
–
15
µs
THIBERNATE
Wakeup from hibernate mode –
Application of external interrupt to
beginning of execution of next CPU
instruction
–
–
100
µs
Figure 11-4. FCPU vs. VDD
Vdd Voltage
5.5 V
Valid Operating Region
3.3 V
1.71 V
Valid Operating Region with SMP
0.5 V
0V
DC
1 MHz
10 MHz
67 MHz
CPU Frequency
Note
29. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 71 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.3 Power Regulators
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,
except where noted.
11.3.1 Digital Core Regulator
Table 11-4. Digital Core Regulator DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Input voltage
VDDD
Output voltage
VCCD
Regulator output capacitor
Conditions
± 10%, ×5R ceramic or better. The two
VCCD pins must be shorted together, with
as short a trace as possible, see Power
System on page 29
Figure 11-5. Regulators VCC vs VDD
Min
1.8
–
–
Typ
–
1.80
1
Max
5.5
–
–
Units
V
V
µF
Figure 11-6. Digital Regulator PSRR vs Frequency and VDD
11.3.2 Analog Core Regulator
Table 11-5. Analog Core Regulator DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Input voltage
VDDA
Output voltage
VCCA
Regulator output capacitor
Conditions
±10%, ×5R ceramic or better
Min
1.8
–
–
Typ
–
1.80
1
Max
5.5
–
–
Units
V
V
µF
Figure 11-7. Analog Regulator PSRR vs Frequency and VDD
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 72 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.3.3 Inductive Boost Regulator.
Table 11-6. Inductive Boost Regulator DC Specifications
Unless otherwise specified, operating conditions are: VBAT = 2.4 V, VOUT = 2.7 V, IOUT = 40 mA, FSW = 400 kHz, LBOOST = 10 µH,
CBOOST = 22 µF || 0.1 µF
Parameter
VBAT
IOUT
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Input voltage
Includes startup
T=-35 °C to +65 °C
0.5
–
3.6
V
Over entire temperature range
0.68
–
3.6
V
Load current, steady
state[30, 31]
VBAT = 1.6 – 3.6 V, VOUT = 3.6 – 5.0 V,
external diode
–
–
50
mA
VBAT = 1.6 – 3.6 V, VOUT = 1.6 – 3.6 V,
internal diode
–
–
75
mA
VBAT = 0.8 – 1.6 V, VOUT = 1.6 – 3.6 V,
internal diode
–
–
30
mA
VBAT = 0.8 – 1.6 V, VOUT = 3.6 – 5.0 V,
external diode
–
–
20
mA
VBAT = 0.5 – 0.8 V, VOUT = 1.6 – 3.6 V,
internal diode
–
–
15
mA
ILPK
Inductor peak current
IQ
Quiescent current
VOUT
Conditions
–
–
700
mA
Boost active mode
–
200
–
µA
Boost standby mode, 32 khz external crystal
oscillator, IOUT < 1 µA
–
12
–
µA
Boost voltage range[34, 33]
1.8 V
1.71
1.80
1.89
V
1.9 V
1.81
1.90
2.00
V
2.0 V
1.90
2.00
2.10
V
2.4 V
2.28
2.40
2.52
V
2.7 V
2.57
2.70
2.84
V
3.0 V
2.85
3.00
3.15
V
3.3 V
3.14
3.30
3.47
V
3.6 V
3.42
3.60
3.78
V
4.75
5.00
5.25
V
RegLOAD
5.0 V
Load regulation
External diode required
–
–
3.8
%
RegLINE
Line regulation
–
–
4.1
%
Table 11-7. Inductive Boost Regulator AC Specifications
Unless otherwise specified, operating conditions are: VBAT = 2.4 V, VOUT = 2.7 V, IOUT = 40 mA, FSW = 400 kHz, LBOOST = 10 µH,
CBOOST = 22 µF || 0.1 µF.
Parameter
VRIPPLE
Description
Ripple voltage
(peak-to-peak)
Conditions
0.5 V < VBAT < 1.7V, VOUT = 1.8 V,
FSW = 400 kHz, IOUT = 10 mA
Min
–
Typ
–
Max
100
Units
mV
Notes
30. For output voltages above 3.6 V, an external diode is required.
31. Maximum output current applies for output voltages 4x input voltage.
32. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
33. At boost frequency of 400 kHz, VOUT is limited to 4 x VBAT.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 73 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 11-8. Recommended External Components for Boost Circuit
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
LBOOST
Boost inductor
–
10
–
µH
CBOOST
Filter capacitor[34]
10
22
47
µF
IF
External Schottky diode
average forward current
1
–
–
A
20
–
–
V
External Schottky diode is required for
VOUT > 3.6 V
VR
Figure 11-8. Efficiency vs VOUT
IOUT = 5 mA, VBAT = 0.6 V, 1.2 V, and 2.4 V
Figure 11-9. Efficiency vs VOUT
IOUT = 30 mA, VBAT = 0.6 V and 1.2 V
Figure 11-10. Efficiency vs VOUT
IOUT = 75 mA, VBAT = 1.2 V
Figure 11-11. Efficiency vs IOUT
VBAT = 2.4 V, VOUT = 3.3 V
Note
34. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 74 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.4 Inputs and Outputs
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,
except where noted. Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values.
When the power supplies ramp up, there are low-impedance connections between each GPIO pin and its VDDIO supply. This causes
the pin voltages to track VDDIO until both VDDIO and VDDA reach the IPOR voltage, which can be as high as 1.45 V. At that point, the
low-impedance connections no longer exist and the pins change to their normal NVL settings.
11.4.1 GPIO
Table 11-9. GPIO DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
VIH
Input voltage high threshold
CMOS Input, PRT[×]CTL = 0
VIL
Input voltage low threshold
CMOS Input, PRT[×]CTL = 0
VIH
Input voltage high threshold
LVTTL Input, PRT[×]CTL =
1,VDDIO < 2.7 V
VIH
Input voltage high threshold
LVTTL Input, PRT[×]CTL = 1,
VDDIO 2.7V
VIL
Input voltage low threshold
VIL
VOH
Min
Typ
Max
Units
0.7 VDDIO
–
–
V
–
–
0.3 VDDIO
V
0.7 × VDDIO
–
–
V
2.0
–
–
V
LVTTL Input, PRT[×]CTL =
1,VDDIO < 2.7 V
–
–
0.3 × VDDIO
V
Input voltage low threshold
LVTTL Input, PRT[×]CTL = 1,
VDDIO 2.7V
–
–
0.8
V
Output voltage high
IOH = 4 mA at 3.3 VDDIO
VDDIO – 0.6
–
–
V
IOH = 1 mA at 1.8 VDDIO
VDDIO – 0.5
–
–
V
IOL = 8 mA at 3.3 VDDIO
–
–
0.6
V
VOL
Output voltage low
Rpullup
Pull-up resistor
IOL = 4 mA at 1.8 VDDIO
Rpulldown Pull-down resistor
–
–
0.6
V
3.5
5.6
8.5
k
3.5
5.6
8.5
k
IIL
Input leakage current (absolute value)[35]
25 °C, VDDIO = 3.0 V
–
–
2
nA
CIN
Input capacitance[35]
GPIOs not shared with opamp
outputs, MHz ECO or kHzECO
–
4
7
pF
GPIOs shared with MHz ECO
or kHzECO[36]
–
5
7
pF
GPIOs shared with opamp
outputs
–
–
18
pF
VH
Input voltage hysteresis
(Schmitt-Trigger)[35]
–
40
–
mV
Idiode
Current through protection diode to
VDDIO and VSSIO
–
–
100
µA
Rglobal
Resistance pin to analog global bus
25 °C, VDDIO = 3.0 V
–
320
–
Rmux
Resistance pin to analog mux bus
25 °C, VDDIO = 3.0 V
–
220
–
Notes
35. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
36. For information on designing with PSoC 3 oscillators, refer to the application note, AN54439 - PSoC® 3 and PSoC 5 External Oscillator.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 75 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 11-12. GPIO Output High Voltage and Current
Figure 11-13. GPIO Output Low Voltage and Current
Table 11-10. GPIO AC Specifications
Parameter
TriseF
TfallF
TriseS
TfallS
Fgpioout
Fgpioin
Description
Rise time in Fast Strong Mode[37]
Fall time in Fast Strong Mode[37]
Rise time in Slow Strong Mode[37]
Fall time in Slow Strong Mode[37]
GPIO output operating frequency
2.7 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V, fast strong drive
mode
1.71 V < VDDIO < 2.7 V, fast strong drive
mode
3.3 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V, slow strong drive
mode
1.71 V < VDDIO < 3.3 V, slow strong
drive mode
GPIO input operating frequency
1.71 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V
Conditions
3.3 V VDDIO Cload = 25 pF
3.3 V VDDIO Cload = 25 pF
3.3 V VDDIO Cload = 25 pF
3.3 V VDDIO Cload = 25 pF
90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF
Min
–
–
–
–
–
–
Typ
–
–
–
–
–
–
Max
12
12
60
60
–
33
Units
ns
ns
ns
ns
–
MHz
90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF
–
–
20
MHz
90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF
–
–
7
MHz
90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF
–
–
3.5
MHz
90/10% VDDIO
–
–
66
MHz
Figure 11-14. GPIO Output Rise and Fall Times, Fast Strong
Mode, VDDIO = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load
Figure 11-15. GPIO Output Rise and Fall Times, Slow Strong
Mode, VDDIO = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load
Note
37. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 76 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.4.2 SIO
Table 11-11. SIO DC Specifications
Parameter
Vinmax
Description
Maximum input voltage
Vinref
Input voltage reference (Differ0.5
ential input mode)
Output voltage reference (Regulated output mode)
1
VDDIO > 3.7
1
VDDIO < 3.7
Input voltage high threshold
GPIO mode
CMOS input
0.7 VDDIO
Hysteresis disabled
SIO_ref + 0.2
Differential input mode[38]
Input voltage low threshold
GPIO mode
CMOS input
–
Hysteresis disabled
–
Differential input mode[38]
Output voltage high
VDDIO – 0.4
Unregulated mode
IOH = 4 mA, VDDIO = 3.3 V
IOH = 1 mA
SIO_ref – 0.65
Regulated mode[38]
Regulated mode[38]
IOH = 0.1 mA
SIO_ref – 0.3
Output voltage low
–
VDDIO = 3.30 V, IOL = 25 mA
VDDIO = 1.80 V, IOL = 4 mA
–
Pull-up resistor
3.5
Pull-down resistor
3.5
Input leakage current (absolute
–
value)[39]
VIH < Vddsio
25 °C, Vddsio = 3.0 V, VIH = 3.0 V
–
25 °C, Vddsio = 0 V, VIH = 3.0 V
–
VIH > Vddsio
Input Capacitance[39]
–
Input voltage hysteresis
Single ended mode (GPIO mode)
–
(Schmitt-Trigger)[39]
Differential mode
–
–
Current through protection diode
to VSSIO
Voutref
VIH
VIL
VOH
VOL
Rpullup
Rpulldown
IIL
CIN
VH
Idiode
Conditions
All allowed values of VDDIO and
Vddd, see Section 11.2.1
Min
–
Typ
–
Max
5.5
Units
V
–
0.52 VDDIO
V
–
–
VDDIO – 1
VDDIO – 0.5
V
V
–
–
–
–
V
V
–
–
0.3 VDDIO
SIO_ref – 0.2
V
V
–
–
–
–
SIO_ref + 0.2
SIO_ref + 0.2
V
V
V
–
–
5.6
5.6
–
0.8
0.4
8.5
8.5
–
V
V
k
k
–
–
–
–
40
35
–
14
10
7
–
–
100
nA
µA
pF
mV
mV
µA
Notes
38. See Figure 6-9 on page 36 and Figure 6-12 on page 40 for more information on SIO reference.
39. Based on device characterization (Not production tested)
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 77 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 11-16. SIO Output High Voltage and Current,
Unregulated Mode
Figure 11-17. SIO Output Low Voltage and Current,
Unregulated Mode
Figure 11-18. SIO Output High Voltage and Current, Regulated Mode
Table 11-12. SIO AC Specifications
Parameter
TriseF
TfallF
TriseS
TfallS
Description
Rise time in Fast Strong Mode
(90/10%)[39]
Fall time in Fast Strong Mode
(90/10%)[39]
Rise time in Slow Strong Mode
(90/10%)[39]
Fall time in Slow Strong Mode
(90/10%)[39]
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Conditions
Cload = 25 pF, VDDIO = 3.3 V
Min
–
Typ
–
Max
12
Units
ns
Cload = 25 pF, VDDIO = 3.3 V
–
–
12
ns
Cload = 25 pF, VDDIO = 3.0 V
–
–
75
ns
Cload = 25 pF, VDDIO = 3.0 V
–
–
60
ns
Page 78 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 11-12. SIO AC Specifications (continued)
Parameter
Fsioout
Fsioin
Description
SIO output operating frequency
2.7 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V, Unregulated output (GPIO) mode, fast
strong drive mode
1.71 V < VDDIO < 2.7 V, Unregulated output (GPIO) mode, fast
strong drive mode
3.3 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V, Unregulated output (GPIO) mode, slow
strong drive mode
1.71 V < VDDIO < 3.3 V, Unregulated output (GPIO) mode, slow
strong drive mode
2.7 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V, Regulated
output mode, fast strong drive
mode
1.71 V < VDDIO < 2.7 V, Regulated
output mode, fast strong drive
mode
1.71 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V, Regulated
output mode, slow strong drive
mode
SIO input operating frequency
1.71 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF
–
–
33
MHz
90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF
–
–
16
MHz
90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF
–
–
5
MHz
90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF
–
–
4
MHz
Output continuously switching
into 25 pF
–
–
20
MHz
Output continuously switching
into 25 pF
–
–
10
MHz
Output continuously switching
into 25 pF
–
–
2.5
MHz
90/10% VDDIO
–
–
66
MHz
Figure 11-19. SIO Output Rise and Fall Times, Fast Strong
Mode, VDDIO = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Figure 11-20. SIO Output Rise and Fall Times, Slow Strong
Mode, VDDIO = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load
Page 79 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.4.3 USBIO
For operation in GPIO mode, the standard range for VDDD applies, see Device Level Specifications on page 68.
Table 11-13. USBIO DC Specifications
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Rusbi
Parameter
USB D+ pull-up resistance
Description
With idle bus
Conditions
0.900
–
1.575
k
Rusba
USB D+ pull-up resistance
While receiving traffic
1.425
–
3.090
k
Vohusb
Static output high
15 k ±5% to Vss, internal pull-up
enabled
2.8
–
3.6
V
Volusb
Static output low
15 k ±5% to Vss, internal pull-up
enabled
–
–
0.3
V
Vihgpio
Input voltage high, GPIO mode
VDDD 3 V
2
–
–
V
Vilgpio
Input voltage low, GPIO mode
VDDD 3 V
–
–
0.8
V
Vohgpio
Output voltage high, GPIO mode
IOH = 4 mA, VDDD 3 V
2.4
–
–
V
V
Volgpio
Output voltage low, GPIO mode
IOL = 4 mA, VDDD 3 V
–
–
0.3
Vdi
Differential input sensitivity
|(D+)–(D–)|
–
–
0.2
V
Vcm
Differential input common mode
range
–
0.8
–
2.5
V
–
0.8
–
2
V
3
–
7
k
21.78
(–1%)
22
22.22
(+1%)
Vse
Single ended receiver threshold
Rps2
PS/2 pull-up resistance
In PS/2 mode, with PS/2 pull-up
enabled
External USB series resistor
In series with each USB pin
Zo
USB driver output impedance
Including Rext
28
–
44
CIN
USB transceiver input capacitance
–
–
20
pF
IIL[40]
Input leakage current (absolute value) 25 °C, VDDD = 3.0 V
–
–
2
nA
Rext
Figure 11-21. USBIO Output High Voltage and Current, GPIO
Mode
Figure 11-22. USBIO Output Low Voltage and Current, GPIO
Mode
Note
40. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 80 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 11-14. USBIO AC Specifications
Parameter
Tdrate
Description
Conditions
Full-speed data rate average bit rate
Min
Typ
Max
Units
12 – 0.25%
12
12 +
0.25%
MHz
Tjr1
Receiver data jitter tolerance to next transition
–8
–
8
ns
Tjr2
Receiver data jitter tolerance to pair transition
–5
–
5
ns
Tdj1
Driver differential jitter to next transition
–3.5
–
3.5
ns
Tdj2
Driver differential jitter to pair transition
–4
–
4
ns
Tfdeop
Source jitter for differential transition to SE0
transition
–2
–
5
ns
Tfeopt
Source SE0 interval of EOP
160
–
175
ns
Tfeopr
Receiver SE0 interval of EOP
82
–
–
ns
Tfst
Width of SE0 interval during differential transition
–
–
14
ns
Fgpio_out
GPIO mode output operating frequency
–
–
20
MHz
Tr_gpio
Rise time, GPIO mode, 10%/90% VDDD
Tf_gpio
Fall time, GPIO mode, 90%/10% VDDD
3 V VDDD 5.5 V
VDDD = 1.71 V
–
–
6
MHz
VDDD > 3 V, 25 pF load
–
–
12
ns
VDDD = 1.71 V, 25 pF load
–
–
40
ns
VDDD > 3 V, 25 pF load
–
–
12
ns
VDDD = 1.71 V, 25 pF load
–
–
40
ns
Figure 11-23. USBIO Output Rise and Fall Times, GPIO Mode,
VDDD = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load
Table 11-15. USB Driver AC Specifications
Parameter
Tr
Description
Conditions
Transition rise time
Tf
Transition fall time
TR
Rise/fall time matching
Vcrs
Output signal crossover voltage
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
VUSB_5, VUSB_3.3, see USB DC
Specifications on page 101
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
20
ns
ns
–
–
20
90%
–
111%
1.3
–
2
V
Page 81 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.4.4 XRES
Table 11-16. XRES DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
VIH
Input voltage high threshold
0.7 VDDIO
–
–
V
VIL
Input voltage low threshold
–
–
0.3
VDDIO
V
Rpullup
Pull-up resistor
3.5
5.6
8.5
k
[41]
CIN
Input capacitance
–
3
–
pF
VH
Input voltage hysteresis
(Schmitt–Trigger)[41]
–
100
–
mV
Idiode
Current through protection diode to
VDDIO and VSSIO
–
–
100
µA
Min
Typ
Max
Units
1
–
–
µs
Table 11-17. XRES AC Specifications
Parameter
TRESET
Description
Conditions
Reset pulse width
11.5 Analog Peripherals
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,
except where noted.
11.5.1 Opamp
Table 11-18. Opamp DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
VIOFF
Input offset voltage
VOS
Conditions
Input offset voltage
Operating temperature –40 °C to
70 °C
Min
–
Typ
–
Max
2
Units
mV
–
–
2.5
mV
–
–
2
mV
µV / °C
TCVOS
Input offset voltage drift with temperature
Power mode = high
–
–
±30
Ge1
Gain error, unity gain buffer mode
Rload = 1 k
–
–
±0.1
%
CIN
Input capacitance
Routing from pin
–
–
18
pF
VO
Output voltage range
1 mA, source or sink, power mode = VSSA + 0.05
high
–
VDDA – 0.05
V
IOUT
Output current capability, source or sink
VSSA + 500 mV Vout VDDA
–500 mV, VDDA > 2.7 V
25
–
–
mA
VSSA + 500 mV Vout VDDA
–500 mV, 1.7 V = VDDA 2.7 V
16
–
–
mA
uA
IDD
Quiescent current
Power mode = min
–
200
270
Power mode = low
–
250
400
uA
Power mode = med
–
330
950
uA
Power mode = high
CMRR
Common mode rejection ratio
PSRR
Power supply rejection ratio
–
1000
2500
uA
80
–
–
dB
VDDA 2.7 V
85
–
–
dB
VDDA < 2.7 V
70
–
–
dB
Note
41. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 82 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 11-24. Opamp Voffset Histogram, 3388 samples/847
parts, 25 °C, Vdda = 5 V
Figure 11-25. Opamp Voffset vs Temperature, VDDA = 5V
Figure 11-26. Opamp Voffset vs Vcommon and
VDDA, 25 °C
Figure 11-27. Opamp Output Voltage vs Load Current and
Temperature, High Power Mode, 25 °C, VDDA = 2.7 V
Figure 11-28. Opamp Operating Current vs VDDA and Power
Mode
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 83 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 11-19. Opamp AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
GBW
Gain-bandwidth product
SR
Slew rate, 20% - 80%
en
Input noise density
Conditions
Power mode = minimum, 15 pF load
Power mode = low, 15 pF load
Power mode = medium, 200 pF load
Power mode = high, 200 pF load
Power mode = low, 15 pF load
Power mode = medium, 200 pF load
Power mode = high, 200 pF load
Power mode = high, VDDA = 5 V,
at 100 kHz
Figure 11-29. Opamp Noise vs Frequency, Power Mode =
High, VDDA = 5V
Min
1
2
1
3
1.1
0.9
3
–
Typ
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
45
Max
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Units
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
V/µs
V/µs
V/µs
nV/sqrtHz
Figure 11-30. Opamp Step Response, Rising
Figure 11-31. Opamp Step Response, Falling
Note
42. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 84 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.5.2 Delta-Sigma ADC
Unless otherwise specified, operating conditions are:
Operation in continuous sample mode
fclk = 6.144 MHz
Reference = 1.024 V internal reference bypassed on P3.2 or P0.3
Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values
Table 11-20. 12-bit Delta-sigma ADC DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Resolution
Number of channels, single ended
Number of channels, differential
Monotonic
Ge
Gain error
Gd
Gain drift
Vos
Input offset voltage
TCVos
INL12
DNL12
INL8
DNL8
Rin_Buff
Temperature coefficient, input offset
voltage
Input voltage range, single ended[43]
Input voltage range, differential unbuffered[43]
Input voltage range, differential,
buffered[43]
Integral non linearity[43]
Differential non linearity[43]
Integral non linearity[43]
Differential non linearity[43]
ADC input resistance
Rin_ADC12 ADC input resistance
Differential pair is formed using a
pair of GPIOs.
Yes
Buffered, buffer gain = 1,
Range = ±1.024 V, 25 °C
Buffered, buffer gain = 1,
Range = ±1.024 V
Buffered, 12-bit mode, VDDA = 2.7 V,
25 °C
Buffer gain = 1, 12-bit,
Range = ±1.024 V
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered
Input buffer used
Input buffer bypassed, 12 bit, Range
= ±1.024 V
ADC external reference input voltage, see
also internal reference in Voltage
Pins P0[3], P3[2]
Reference on page 87
Current Consumption
Current consumption, 12 bit[43]
192 ksps, unbuffered
IDD_12
Buffer current consumption[43]
IBUFF
Vextref
Min
8
Typ
–
Units
bits
–
Max
12
No. of
GPIO
No. of
GPIO/2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
±0.2
%
–
–
50
ppm/°C
–
–
±0.1
mV
–
–
0.55
µV/°C
VSSA
–
VDDA
V
VSSA
–
VDDA
V
VSSA
–
VDDA – 1
V
–
–
–
–
10
–
–
–
–
–
±1
±1
±1
±1
–
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
M
–
148[44]
–
k
0.9
–
1.3
V
–
–
–
–
1.4
2.5
mA
mA
–
–
–
Notes
43. Based on device characterization (not production tested).
44. By using switched capacitors at the ADC input an effective input resistance is created. Holding the gain and number of bits constant, the resistance is proportional to
the inverse of the clock frequency. This value is calculated, not measured. For more information see the Technical Reference Manual.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 85 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 11-21. Delta-sigma ADC AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Startup time
Total harmonic distortion[45]
THD
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
4
Samples
Buffer gain = 1, 12-bit,
Range = ±1.024 V
–
–
0.0032
%
12-Bit Resolution Mode
SR12
Sample rate, continuous, high power[45]
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered
4
–
192
ksps
BW12
Input bandwidth at max sample rate[45]
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered
–
44
–
kHz
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered
66
–
–
dB
[45]
SINAD12int Signal to noise ratio, 12-bit, internal reference
8-Bit Resolution Mode
SR8
Sample rate, continuous, high power[45]
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered
8
–
384
ksps
BW8
Input bandwidth at max sample rate[45]
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered
–
88
–
kHz
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered
43
–
–
dB
SINAD8int
Signal to noise ratio, 8-bit, internal
reference[45]
Table 11-22. Delta-sigma ADC Sample Rates, Range = ±1.024 V
Continuous
Resolution,
Bits
Min
Max
8
8000
9
6400
10
11
12
Multi-Sample
Min
Max
384000
1911
91701
307200
1543
74024
5566
267130
1348
64673
4741
227555
1154
55351
4000
192000
978
46900
Figure 11-32. Delta-sigma ADC IDD vs sps, Range = ±1.024 V,
Continuous Sample Mode, Input Buffer Bypassed
Note
45. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 86 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.5.3 Voltage Reference
Table 11-23. Voltage Reference Specifications
See also ADC external reference specifications in Section 11.5.2.
Parameter
VREF
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
1.023
(–0.1%)
1.024
1.025
(+0.1%)
V
–20 °C to 80 °C, packages
100-TQFP, 68-QFN, 48-QFN
–
–
20
ppm/°C
–20 °C to 80 °C, package
48-SSOP
–
–
25
–40 °C to 85 °C, packages
100-TQFP, 68-QFN, 48-QFN
–
–
25
–40 °C to 85 °C, package
48-SSOP
–
–
30
–
100
–
ppm/Khr
–
100
–
ppm
Precision reference voltage
Initial trimming
Temperature drift[46]
Long term drift
[46, 47]
Thermal cycling drift (stability)
Figure 11-33. Voltage Reference vs. Temperature and VCCA
Figure 11-34. Voltage Reference Long-Term Drift
11.5.4 Analog Globals
Table 11-24. Analog Globals Specifications
Parameter
Rppag
Rppmuxbus
Description
Resistance pin-to-pin through
P2[4], AGL0, DSM INP, AGL1,
P2[5][48]
Resistance pin-to-pin through
P2[3], amuxbusL, P2[4][48]
Conditions
VDDA = 3 V
VDDA = 3 V
Min
–
Typ
1472
Max
2200
Units
–
706
1100
Notes
46. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
47. After eight full cycles between –40 °C and 100 °C.
48. The resistance of the analog global and analog mux bus is high if VDDA 2.7 V, and the chip is in either sleep or hibernate mode. Use of analog global and analog
mux bus under these conditions is not recommended.
49. The recommended procedure for using a custom trim value for the on-chip comparators can be found in the TRM.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 87 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.5.5 Comparator
Table 11-25. Comparator DC Specifications
Parameter
VOS
VHYST
VICM
CMRR
ICMP
Description
Input offset voltage in fast mode
Conditions
Factory trim, VDDA > 2.7 V,
Vin 0.5 V
Input offset voltage in slow mode Factory trim, Vin 0.5 V
Input offset voltage in fast mode[48] Custom trim
Input offset voltage in slow mode[48] Custom trim
Input offset voltage in ultra
VDDA ≤ 4.6 V
low-power mode
Hysteresis
Hysteresis enable mode
Input common mode voltage
High current / fast mode
Low current / slow mode
Ultra low power mode
VDDA ≤ 4.6 V
Common mode rejection ratio
High current mode/fast mode[46]
Low current mode/slow mode[46]
Ultra low-power mode[46]
VDDA ≤ 4.6 V
Min
–
Typ
Max
10
Units
mV
–
–
–
–
–
–
±12
9
4
4
–
mV
mV
mV
mV
–
VSSA
VSSA
VSSA
10
–
–
–
32
VDDA
VDDA
VDDA – 1.15
mV
V
V
V
–
–
–
–
50
–
–
6
–
400
100
–
dB
µA
µA
µA
Table 11-26. Comparator AC Specifications
Parameter
TRESP
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Response time, high current
mode[46]
Description
50 mV overdrive, measured
pin-to-pin
Conditions
–
75
110
ns
Response time, low current
mode[46]
50 mV overdrive, measured
pin-to-pin
–
155
200
ns
Response time, ultra low-power
mode[46]
50 mV overdrive, measured
pin-to-pin, VDDA ≤ 4.6 V
–
55
–
µs
11.5.6 Current Digital-to-analog Converter (IDAC)
All specifications are based on use of the low-resistance IDAC output pins (see Pin Descriptions on page 10 for details). See the IDAC
component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full electrical specifications and APIs.
Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values.
Table 11-27. IDAC DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
8
bits
Range = 2.04 mA, code = 255,
VDDA 2.7 V, Rload = 600
–
2.04
–
mA
Range = 2.04 mA, high speed
mode, code = 255, VDDA 2.7 V,
Rload = 300
–
2.04
–
mA
Range = 255 µA, code = 255, Rload
= 600
–
255
–
µA
Range = 31.875 µA, code = 255,
Rload = 600
–
31.875
–
µA
–
–
Yes
Resolution
IOUT
Output current at code = 255
Monotonicity
Ezs
Zero scale error
Eg
Gain error
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
–
0
±1
LSB
Range = 2.04 mA, 25 °C
–
–
±2.5
%
Range = 255 µA, 25 ° C
–
–
±2.5
%
Range = 31.875 µA, 25 ° C
–
–
±3.5
%
Page 88 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 11-27. IDAC DC Specifications (continued)
Parameter
TC_Eg
INL
DNL
Description
Temperature coefficient of gain
error
Integral nonlinearity
Differential nonlinearity
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Range = 2.04 mA
–
–
0.04
% / °C
Range = 255 µA
–
–
0.04
% / °C
Range = 31.875 µA
–
–
0.05
% / °C
Sink mode, range = 255 µA, Codes
8 – 255, Rload = 2.4 k, Cload =
15 pF
–
±0.9
±1
LSB
Source mode, range = 255 µA,
Codes 8 – 255, Rload = 2.4 k,
Cload = 15 pF
–
±1.2
±1.5
LSB
Sink mode, range = 255 µA, Rload
= 2.4 k, Cload = 15 pF
–
±0.3
±1
LSB
Source mode, range = 255 µA,
Rload = 2.4 k, Cload = 15 pF
–
±0.3
±1
LSB
Vcompliance
Dropout voltage, source or sink
mode
Voltage headroom at max current,
Rload to VDDA or Rload to VSSA,
VDIFF from VDDA
1
–
–
V
IDD
Operating current, code = 0
Low speed mode, source mode,
range = 31.875 µA
–
44
100
µA
Low speed mode, source mode,
range = 255 µA,
–
33
100
µA
Low speed mode, source mode,
range = 2.04 mA
–
33
100
µA
Low speed mode, sink mode,
range = 31.875 µA
–
36
100
µA
Low speed mode, sink mode,
range = 255 µA
–
33
100
µA
Low speed mode, sink mode,
range = 2.04 mA
–
33
100
µA
High speed mode, source mode,
range = 31.875 µA
–
310
500
µA
High speed mode, source mode,
range = 255 µA
–
305
500
µA
High speed mode, source mode,
range = 2.04 mA
–
305
500
µA
High speed mode, sink mode,
range = 31.875 µA
–
310
500
µA
High speed mode, sink mode,
range = 255 µA
–
300
500
µA
High speed mode, sink mode,
range = 2.04 mA
–
300
500
µA
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 89 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 11-35. IDAC INL vs Input Code, Range = 255 µA,
Source Mode
Figure 11-36. IDAC INL vs Input Code, Range = 255 µA, Sink
Mode
Figure 11-37. IDAC DNL vs Input Code, Range = 255 µA,
Source Mode
Figure 11-38. IDAC DNL vs Input Code, Range = 255 µA, Sink
Mode
Figure 11-39. IDAC INL vs Temperature, Range = 255 µA, High
speed mode
Figure 11-40. IDAC DNL vs Temperature, Range = 255 µA,
High speed mode
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 90 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 11-41. IDAC Full Scale Error vs Temperature, Range
= 255 µA, Source Mode
Figure 11-42. IDAC Full Scale Error vs Temperature, Range
= 255 µA, Sink Mode
Figure 11-43. IDAC Operating Current vs Temperature,
Range = 255 µA, Code = 0, Source Mode
Figure 11-44. IDAC Operating Current vs Temperature,
Range = 255 µA, Code = 0, Sink Mode
Table 11-28. IDAC AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
FDAC
Update rate
–
–
8
Msps
TSETTLE
Settling time to 0.5 LSB
Range = 31.875 µA or 255 µA, full
scale transition, High speed mode,
600 15-pF load
–
–
125
ns
Current noise
Range = 255 µA, source mode,
High speed mode, VDDA = 5 V,
10 kHz
–
340
–
pA/sqrtHz
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 91 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 11-45. IDAC Step Response, Codes 0x40 - 0xC0,
255 µA Mode, Source Mode, High speed mode, VDDA = 5 V
Figure 11-46. IDAC Glitch Response, Codes 0x7F - 0x80,
255 µA Mode, Source Mode, High speed mode, VDDA = 5 V
Figure 11-47. IDAC PSRR vs Frequency
Figure 11-48. IDAC Current Noise, 255 µA Mode,
Source Mode, High speed mode, VDDA = 5 V
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 92 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.5.7 Voltage Digital to Analog Converter (VDAC)
See the VDAC component datasheet in PSoC Creator for full electrical specifications and APIs.
Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values.
Table 11-29. VDAC DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Resolution
Min
8
–
bits
±2.1
±2.5
LSB
1 V scale
–
±0.3
±1
LSB
1 V scale
–
4
–
k
16
–
k
1.02
–
V
4.08
–
V
–
Yes
–
DNL1
Differential nonlinearity
Rout
Output resistance
4 V scale
–
VOUT
Output voltage range, code = 255
1 V scale
–
1 V scale
–
–
4 V scale, VDDA = 5 V
Monotonicity
Zero scale error
Gain error
TC_Eg
IDD
Operating current
Units
–
Integral nonlinearity
VOS
Max
–
INL1
Eg
Typ
–
0
±0.9
LSB
1 V scale
–
–
±2.5
%
4 V scale
–
–
±2.5
%
Temperature coefficient, gain error 1 V scale
–
–
0.03
%FSR / °C
Figure 11-49. VDAC INL vs Input Code, 1 V Mode
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
4 V scale
–
–
0.03
%FSR / °C
Low speed mode
–
–
100
µA
High speed mode
–
–
500
µA
Figure 11-50. VDAC DNL vs Input Code, 1 V Mode
Page 93 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 11-51. VDAC INL vs Temperature, 1 V Mode
Figure 11-52. VDAC DNL vs Temperature, 1 V Mode
Figure 11-53. VDAC Full Scale Error vs Temperature, 1 V
Mode
Figure 11-54. VDAC Full Scale Error vs Temperature, 4 V
Mode
Figure 11-55. VDAC Operating Current vs Temperature, 1V
Mode, Low speed mode
Figure 11-56. VDAC Operating Current vs Temperature, 1 V
Mode, High speed mode
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 94 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 11-30. VDAC AC Specifications
Parameter
FDAC
Description
Update rate
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
1 V scale
–
–
1000
ksps
4 V scale
–
–
250
ksps
–
0.45
1
µs
TsettleP
Settling time to 0.1%, step 25% to 1 V scale, Cload = 15 pF
75%
4 V scale, Cload = 15 pF
–
0.8
3.2
µs
TsettleN
Settling time to 0.1%, step 75% to 1 V scale, Cload = 15 pF
25%
–
0.45
1
µs
4 V scale, Cload = 15 pF
–
0.7
3
µs
Range = 1 V, High speed mode,
VDDA = 5 V, 10 kHz
–
750
–
nV/sqrtHz
Voltage noise
Figure 11-57. VDAC Step Response, Codes 0x40 - 0xC0, 1 V
Mode, High speed mode, VDDA = 5 V
Figure 11-58. VDAC Glitch Response, Codes 0x7F - 0x80, 1 V
Mode, High speed mode, VDDA = 5 V
Figure 11-59. VDAC PSRR vs Frequency
Figure 11-60. VDAC Voltage Noise, 1 V Mode, High speed
mode, VDDA = 5 V
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 95 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.5.8 Mixer
The mixer is created using a SC/CT analog block; see the Mixer component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full electrical specifications
and APIs.
Table 11-31. Mixer DC Specifications
Parameter
VOS
G
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
10
mV
Quiescent current
–
0.9
2
mA
Gain
–
0
–
dB
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Input offset voltage
Table 11-32. Mixer AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
fLO
Local oscillator frequency
Down mixer mode
–
–
4
MHz
fin
Input signal frequency
Down mixer mode
–
–
14
MHz
fLO
Local oscillator frequency
Up mixer mode
–
–
1
MHz
fin
Input signal frequency
Up mixer mode
–
–
1
MHz
SR
Slew rate
3
–
–
V/µs
11.5.9 Transimpedance Amplifier
The TIA is created using a SC/CT analog block; see the TIA component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full electrical specifications
and APIs.
Table 11-33. Transimpedance Amplifier (TIA) DC Specifications
Parameter
VIOFF
Rconv
Description
Input offset voltage
Conversion resistance[51]
Conditions
Min
–
–25
–25
–25
–25
–25
–25
–25
–25
–
Typ
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1.1
Max
10
+35
+35
+35
+35
+35
+35
+35
+35
2
Units
mV
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
mA
Conditions
R = 20K; –40 pF load
Min
1500
Typ
–
Max
–
Units
kHz
R = 120K; –40 pF load
R = 1M; –40 pF load
240
25
–
–
–
–
kHz
kHz
R = 20K; 40 pF load
R = 30K; 40 pF load
R = 40K; 40 pF load
R = 80K; 40 pF load
R = 120K; 40 pF load
R = 250K; 40 pF load
R= 500K; 40 pF load
R = 1M; 40 pF load
Quiescent current
Table 11-34. Transimpedance Amplifier (TIA) AC Specifications
Parameter
BW
Description
Input bandwidth (–3 dB)
Notes
50. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
51. Conversion resistance values are not calibrated. Calibrated values and details about calibration are provided in PSoC Creator component data sheets. External
precision resistors can also be used.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 96 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.5.10 Programmable Gain Amplifier
The PGA is created using a SC/CT analog block; see the PGA component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full electrical specifications
and APIs.
Unless otherwise specified, operating conditions are:
Operating temperature = 25 °C for typical values
Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values
Table 11-35. PGA DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
VSSA
–
VDDA
V
Vin
Input voltage range
Power mode = minimum
Vos
Input offset voltage
Power mode = high,
gain = 1
–
–
10
mV
TCVos
Input offset voltage drift
with temperature
Power mode = high,
gain = 1
–
–
±30
µV/°C
Ge1
Gain error, gain = 1
–
–
±0.15
%
Ge16
Gain error, gain = 16
–
–
±2.5
%
Ge50
Gain error, gain = 50
–
–
±5
%
Vonl
DC output nonlinearity
–
–
±0.01
% of
FSR
Cin
Input capacitance
–
–
7
pF
Voh
Output voltage swing
Power mode = high,
gain = 1, Rload = 100 k
to VDDA / 2
VDDA – 0.15
–
–
V
Vol
Output voltage swing
Power mode = high,
gain = 1, Rload = 100 k
to VDDA / 2
–
–
VSSA + 0.15
V
Vsrc
Output voltage under load
Iload = 250 µA, VDDA
2.7 V, power mode = high
–
–
300
mV
Idd
Operating current
Power mode = high
–
1.5
1.65
mA
PSRR
Power supply rejection
ratio
48
–
–
dB
Gain = 1
Figure 11-61. PGA Voffset Histogram, 4096 samples/
1024 parts
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 97 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 11-36. PGA AC Specifications
Parameter
BW1
Description
–3 dB bandwidth
SR1
Slew rate
en
Input noise density
Conditions
Power mode = high,
gain = 1, input = 100 mV
peak-to-peak
Power mode = high,
gain = 1, 20% to 80%
Power mode = high,
VDDA = 5 V, at 100 kHz
Figure 11-62. Bandwidth vs. Temperature, at Different Gain
Settings, Power Mode = High
Min
6.7
Typ
8
Max
–
Units
MHz
3
–
–
V/µs
–
43
–
nV/sqrtHz
Figure 11-63. Noise vs. Frequency, VDDA = 5 V,
Power Mode = High
11.5.11 Temperature Sensor
Table 11-37. Temperature Sensor Specifications
Parameter
Description
Temp sensor accuracy
Conditions
Range: –40 °C to +85 °C
Min
–
Typ
±5
Max
–
Units
°C
Min
–
Typ
38
Max
–
Units
A
–
2
260
–
–
5
µA
V
–
–
9.1 × VDDA
500
–
5000
mV
pF
–
355
–
–
20
710
mV
µA
11.5.12 LCD Direct Drive
Table 11-38. LCD Direct Drive DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
ICC
LCD system operating current
ICC_SEG
VBIAS
IOUT
Conditions
Device sleep mode with wakeup at
400-Hz rate to refresh LCDs, bus
clock = 3 Mhz, VDDIO = VDDA = 3 V,
4 commons, 16 segments, 1/4 duty
cycle, 50 Hz frame rate, no glass
connected
Current per segment driver
Strong drive mode
LCD bias range (VBIAS refers to the main VDDA 3 V and VDDA VBIAS
output voltage(V0) of LCD DAC)
LCD bias step size
VDDA 3 V and VDDA VBIAS
LCD capacitance per
Drivers may be combined
segment/common driver
Long term segment offset
Output drive current per segment driver) VDDIO = 5.5V, strong drive mode
Table 11-39. LCD Direct Drive AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
fLCD
LCD frame rate
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Conditions
Min
10
Typ
50
Max
150
Units
Hz
Page 98 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.6 Digital Peripherals
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,
except where noted.
11.6.1 Timer
The following specifications apply to the Timer/Counter/PWM peripheral in timer mode. Timers can also be implemented in UDBs; for
more information, see the Timer component data sheet in PSoC Creator.
Table 11-40. Timer DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Block current consumption
Conditions
16-bit timer, at listed input clock
frequency
3 MHz
12 MHz
48 MHz
67 MHz
Min
–
Typ
–
Max
–
Units
µA
–
–
–
–
15
60
260
350
–
–
–
–
µA
µA
µA
µA
Min
DC
15
30
15
15
30
15
30
Typ
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Max
67.01
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Units
MHz
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Table 11-41. Timer AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Operating frequency
Capture pulse width (Internal)
Capture pulse width (external)
Timer resolution
Enable pulse width
Enable pulse width (external)
Reset pulse width
Reset pulse width (external)
Conditions
11.6.2 Counter
The following specifications apply to the Timer/Counter/PWM peripheral, in counter mode. Counters can also be implemented in
UDBs; for more information, see the Counter component data sheet in PSoC Creator.
Table 11-42. Counter DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Block current consumption
Conditions
16–bit counter, at listed input clock
frequency
3 MHz
12 MHz
48 MHz
67 MHz
Min
–
Typ
–
Max
–
Units
µA
–
–
–
–
15
60
260
350
–
–
–
–
µA
µA
µA
µA
Min
DC
15
15
15
30
15
30
15
30
Typ
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Max
67.01
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Units
MHz
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Table 11-43. Counter AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Operating frequency
Capture pulse
Resolution
Pulse width
Pulse width (external)
Enable pulse width
Enable pulse width (external)
Reset pulse width
Reset pulse width (external)
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Conditions
Page 99 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.6.3 Pulse Width Modulation
The following specifications apply to the Timer/Counter/PWM peripheral, in PWM mode. PWM components can also be implemented
in UDBs; for more information, see the PWM component data sheet in PSoC Creator.
Table 11-44. PWM DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Block current consumption
Conditions
16-bit PWM, at listed input clock
frequency
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
–
µA
3 MHz
–
15
–
µA
12 MHz
–
60
–
µA
48 MHz
–
260
–
µA
67 MHz
–
350
–
µA
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Operating frequency
DC
–
67.01
MHz
Pulse width
15
–
–
ns
Pulse width (external)
30
–
–
ns
Kill pulse width
15
–
–
ns
Kill pulse width (external)
30
–
–
ns
Enable pulse width
15
–
–
ns
Enable pulse width (external)
30
–
–
ns
Reset pulse width
15
–
–
ns
Reset pulse width (external)
30
–
–
ns
Table 11-45. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
11.6.4 I2C
Table 11-46. Fixed I2C DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Block current consumption
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Enabled, configured for 100 kbps
–
–
250
µA
Enabled, configured for 400 kbps
–
–
260
µA
Wake from sleep mode
–
–
30
µA
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
1
Mbps
Conditions
Min
–
Typ
–
Max
200
Units
µA
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
1
Mbit
Table 11-47. Fixed I2C AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Bit rate
Controller Area Network[52]
Table 11-48. CAN DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Block current consumption
IDD
Table 11-49. CAN AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Bit rate
Minimum 8 MHz clock
Note
52. Refer to ISO 11898 specification for details.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 100 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.6.5 Digital Filter Block
Table 11-50. DFB DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
DFB operating current
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
100 kHz (1.3 ksps)
–
0.03
0.05
mA
500 kHz (6.7 ksps)
–
0.16
0.27
mA
1 MHz (13.4 ksps)
–
0.33
0.53
mA
64-tap FIR at FDFB
10 MHz (134 ksps)
–
3.3
5.3
mA
48 MHz (644 ksps)
–
15.7
25.5
mA
67 MHz (900 ksps)
–
21.8
35.6
mA
Min
Typ
Max
Units
DC
–
67.01
MHz
Min
Typ
Max
Units
USB configured, USB regulator
enabled
4.35
–
5.25
V
VUSB_3.3
USB configured, USB regulator
bypassed
3.15
–
3.6
V
VUSB_3
USB configured, USB regulator
bypassed[53]
2.85
–
3.6
V
–
10
–
mA
–
8
–
mA
VDDD = 5 V, connected to USB
host, PICU configured to wake on
USB resume signal
–
0.5
–
mA
VDDD = 5 V, disconnected from
USB host
–
0.3
–
mA
VDDD = 3.3 V, connected to USB
host, PICU configured to wake on
USB resume signal
–
0.5
–
mA
VDDD = 3.3 V, disconnected from
USB host
–
0.3
–
mA
Table 11-51. DFB AC Specifications
Parameter
FDFB
Description
Conditions
DFB operating frequency
11.6.6 USB
Table 11-52. USB DC Specifications
Parameter
VUSB_5
IUSB_Configured
Description
Device supply for USB operation
Conditions
Device supply current in device
VDDD = 5 V, FCPU = 1.5 MHz
active mode, bus clock and IMO = V
DDD = 3.3 V, FCPU = 1.5 MHz
24 MHz
IUSB_Suspended Device supply current in device
sleep mode
Note
53. Rise/fall time matching (TR) not guaranteed, see USB Driver AC Specifications on page 81.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 101 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.6.7 Universal Digital Blocks (UDBs)
PSoC Creator provides a library of prebuilt and tested standard digital peripherals (UART, SPI, LIN, PRS, CRC, timer, counter, PWM,
AND, OR, and so on) that are mapped to the UDB array. See the component data sheets in PSoC Creator for full AC/DC specifications,
APIs, and example code.
Table 11-53. UDB AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Datapath Performance
FMAX_TIMER
Maximum frequency of 16-bit timer in
a UDB pair
–
–
67.01
MHz
FMAX_ADDER
Maximum frequency of 16-bit adder
in a UDB pair
–
–
67.01
MHz
FMAX_CRC
Maximum frequency of 16-bit
CRC/PRS in a UDB pair
–
–
67.01
MHz
–
–
67.01
MHz
PLD Performance
FMAX_PLD
Maximum frequency of a two-pass
PLD function in a UDB pair
Clock to Output Performance
tCLK_OUT
Propagation delay for clock in to data 25 °C, VDDD 2.7 V
out, see Figure 11-64.
–
20
25
ns
tCLK_OUT
Propagation delay for clock in to data Worst-case placement, routing,
out, see Figure 11-64.
and pin selection
–
–
55
ns
Figure 11-64. Clock to Output Performance
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 102 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.7 Memory
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,
except where noted.
11.7.1 Flash
Table 11-54. Flash DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Erase and program voltage
Conditions
VDDD pin
Min
Typ
Max
Units
1.71
–
5.5
V
Min
–
–
–
–
–
–
20
Typ
15
10
5
–
–
1.5
–
Max
20
13
7
35
15
2
–
Units
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
seconds
years
10
–
–
Min
1.71
Typ
–
Max
5.5
Units
V
Min
–
20
Typ
2
–
Max
20
–
Units
ms
years
20
–
–
10
–
–
Table 11-55. Flash AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Row write time (erase + program)
TWRITE
Row erase time
TERASE
Row program time
Bulk erase time (16 KB to 64 KB)
TBULK
Sector erase time (8 KB to 16 KB)
Total device programming time
No overhead[54]
TPROG
Flash data retention time, retention
Average ambient temp.
period measured from last erase cycle TA 55 °C, 100 K erase/program
cycles
Average ambient temp.
TA 85 °C, 10 K erase/program
cycles
11.7.2 EEPROM
Table 11-56. EEPROM DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Erase and program voltage
Conditions
Table 11-57. EEPROM AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Single row erase/write cycle time
TWRITE
EEPROM data retention time, retention Average ambient temp, TA 25 °C,
period measured from last erase cycle 1M erase/program cycles
Average ambient temp, TA 55 °C,
100 K erase/program cycles
Average ambient temp.
TA 85 °C, 10 K erase/program
cycles
Note
54. See application note AN62391 for a description of a low-overhead method of programming PSoC 3 flash.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 103 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.7.3 Nonvolatile Latches (NVL))
Table 11-58. NVL DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Erase and program voltage
Conditions
VDDD pin
Min
1.71
Typ
–
Max
5.5
Units
V
Conditions
Programmed at 25 °C
Min
1K
Typ
–
Max
–
Programmed at 0 °C to 70 °C
100
–
–
Programmed at 25 °C
Programmed at 0 °C to 70 °C
20
20
–
–
–
–
Units
program/
erase
cycles
program/
erase
cycles
years
years
Conditions
Min
1.2
Typ
–
Max
–
Units
V
Conditions
Min
DC
Typ
–
Max
67.01
Units
MHz
Table 11-59. NVL AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
NVL endurance
NVL data retention time
11.7.4 SRAM
Table 11-60. SRAM DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
VSRAM
SRAM retention voltage
Table 11-61. SRAM AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
FSRAM
SRAM operating frequency
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 104 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.7.5 External Memory Interface
Figure 11-65. Asynchronous Read Cycle Timing
Tcel
EM_ CEn
Taddrv
Taddrh
EM_ Addr
Address
Toel
EM_ OEn
EM_ WEn
Tdoesu
Tdoeh
EM_ Data
Data
Table 11-62. Asynchronous Read Cycle Specifications
Parameter
T
Description
EMIF clock period[55]
Conditions
VDDA 3.3 V
Min
Typ
Max
Units
30.3
–
–
nS
2T – 5
–
2T+ 5
nS
–
–
5
nS
Tcel
EM_CEn low time
Taddrv
EM_CEn low to EM_Addr valid
Taddrh
Address hold time after EM_Wen high
T
–
–
nS
Toel
EM_OEn low time
2T – 5
–
2T + 5
nS
Tdoesu
Data to EM_OEn high setup time
T + 15
–
–
nS
Tdoeh
Data hold time after EM_OEn high
3
–
–
nS
Note
55. Limited by GPIO output frequency, see Table 11-10 on page 76.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 105 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 11-66. Asynchronous Write Cycle Timing
Taddrv
Taddrh
EM_ Addr
Address
Tcel
EM_ CEn
Twel
EM_ WEn
EM_ OEn
Tdweh
Tdcev
EM_ Data
Data
Table 11-63. Asynchronous Write Cycle Specifications
Parameter
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
30.3
–
–
nS
T–5
–
T+5
nS
–
–
5
nS
T
–
–
nS
T–5
–
T+5
nS
EM_CEn low to data valid
–
–
7
nS
Data hold time after EM_WEn high
T
–
–
nS
T
EMIF clock period[56]
Tcel
EM_CEn low time
Taddrv
EM_CEn low to EM_Addr valid
Taddrh
Address hold time after EM_WEn high
Twel
EM_WEn low time
Tdcev
Tdweh
Conditions
VDDA 3.3 V
Note
56. Limited by GPIO output frequency, see Table 11-10 on page 76.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 106 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 11-67. Synchronous Read Cycle Timing
Tcp/2
EM_ Clock
Tceld
Tcehd
EM_ CEn
Taddriv
Taddrv
EM_ Addr
Address
Toeld
Toehd
EM_ OEn
Tds
Data
EM_ Data
Tadschd
Tadscld
EM_ ADSCn
Table 11-64. Synchronous Read Cycle Specifications
Parameter
Description
period[57]
Conditions
VDDA 3.3 V
Min
Typ
Max
Units
30.3
–
–
nS
T/2
–
–
nS
T
EMIF clock
Tcp/2
EM_Clock pulse high
Tceld
EM_CEn low to EM_Clock high
5
–
–
nS
Tcehd
EM_Clock high to EM_CEn high
T/2 – 5
–
–
nS
Taddrv
EM_Addr valid to EM_Clock high
5
–
–
nS
Taddriv
EM_Clock high to EM_Addr invalid
T/2 – 5
–
–
nS
Toeld
EM_OEn low to EM_Clock high
5
–
–
nS
Toehd
EM_Clock high to EM_OEn high
T
–
–
nS
Tds
Data valid before EM_OEn high
T + 15
–
–
nS
Tadscld
EM_ADSCn low to EM_Clock high
5
–
–
nS
Tadschd
EM_Clock high to EM_ADSCn high
T/2 – 5
–
–
nS
Note
57. Limited by GPIO output frequency, see Table 11-10 on page 76.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 107 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 11-68. Synchronous Write Cycle Timing
Tcp/2
EM_ Clock
Tceld
Tcehd
EM_ CEn
Taddriv
Taddrv
EM_ Addr
Address
Tweld
Twehd
EM_ WEn
Tdh
Tds
Data
EM_ Data
Tadschd
Tadscld
EM_ ADSCn
Table 11-65. Synchronous Write Cycle Specifications
Parameter
Description
Period[58]
Conditions
VDDA 3.3 V
Min
Typ
Max
Units
30.3
–
–
nS
T/2
–
–
nS
T
EMIF clock
Tcp/2
EM_Clock pulse high
Tceld
EM_CEn low to EM_Clock high
5
–
–
nS
Tcehd
EM_Clock high to EM_CEn high
T/2 – 5
–
–
nS
Taddrv
EM_Addr valid to EM_Clock high
5
–
–
nS
Taddriv
EM_Clock high to EM_Addr invalid
T/2 – 5
–
–
nS
Tweld
EM_WEn low to EM_Clock high
5
–
–
nS
Twehd
EM_Clock high to EM_WEn high
T/2 – 5
–
–
nS
Tds
Data valid before EM_Clock high
5
–
–
nS
Tdh
Data invalid after EM_Clock high
T
–
–
nS
Tadscld
EM_ADSCn low to EM_Clock high
5
–
–
nS
Tadschd
EM_Clock high to EM_ADSCn high
T/2 – 5
–
–
nS
Note
58. Limited by GPIO output frequency, see Table 11-10 on page 76.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 108 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.8 PSoC System Resources
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,
except where noted.
11.8.1 POR with Brown Out
For brown out detect in regulated mode, VDDD and VDDA must be 2.0 V. Brown out detect is not available in externally regulated
mode.
Table 11-66. Precise Low-Voltage Reset (PRES) with Brown Out DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
PRESR
Rising trip voltage
PRESF
Falling trip voltage
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
1.64
–
1.68
V
1.62
–
1.66
V
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
0.5
µs
–
5
–
V/sec
Conditions
Min
–
1.68
1.89
2.14
2.38
2.62
2.87
3.11
3.35
3.59
3.84
4.08
4.32
4.56
4.83
5.05
5.30
5.57
Typ
–
1.73
1.95
2.20
2.45
2.71
2.95
3.21
3.46
3.70
3.95
4.20
4.45
4.70
4.98
5.21
5.47
5.75
Max
–
1.77
2.01
2.27
2.53
2.79
3.04
3.31
3.56
3.81
4.07
4.33
4.59
4.84
5.13
5.37
5.63
5.92
Units
–
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
1
µs
Factory trim
Table 11-67. Power On Reset (POR) with Brown Out AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
PRES_TR Response time
VDDD/VDDA droop rate
Sleep mode
11.8.2 Voltage Monitors
Table 11-68. Voltage Monitors DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
LVI
Trip voltage
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0000b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0001b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0010b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0011b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0100b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0101b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0110b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0111b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1000b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1001b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1010b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1011b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1100b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1101b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1110b
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1111b
HVI
Trip voltage
Table 11-69. Voltage Monitors AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Response
time[59]
Note
59. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 109 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.8.3 Interrupt Controller
Table 11-70. Interrupt Controller AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Delay from interrupt signal input to ISR Includes worse case completion of
code execution from ISR code
longest instruction DIV with 6
cycles
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
25
Tcy CPU
11.8.4 JTAG Interface
Figure 11-69. JTAG Interface Timing
(1/f_TCK)
TCK
T_TDI_setup
T_TDI_hold
TDI
T_TDO_valid
T_TDO_hold
TDO
T_TMS_setup
T_TMS_hold
TMS
Table 11-71. JTAG Interface AC Specifications[60]
Parameter
f_TCK
Description
TCK frequency
Conditions
3.3 V VDDD 5 V
1.71 V VDDD < 3.3 V
T_TDI_setup
TDI setup before TCK high
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
14[61]
MHz
MHz
ns
–
–
7[61]
(T/10) – 5
–
–
T/4
–
–
T/4
–
–
T_TMS_setup
TMS setup before TCK high
T_TDI_hold
TDI, TMS hold after TCK high
T = 1/f_TCK max
T_TDO_valid
TCK low to TDO valid
T = 1/f_TCK max
–
–
2T/5
T_TDO_hold
TDO hold after TCK high
T = 1/f_TCK max
T/4
–
–
Notes
60. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
61. f_TCK must also be no more than 1/3 CPU clock frequency.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 110 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.8.5 SWD Interface
Figure 11-70. SWD Interface Timing
(1 /f_S W D C K )
SW DCK
T _S W D I_setup T _S W D I_hold
S W D IO
(P S oC input)
T _S W D O _va lid
T _S W D O _hold
S W D IO
(P S oC output)
Table 11-72. SWD Interface AC Specifications[62]
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
[63]
Units
3.3 V VDDD 5 V
–
–
14
1.71 V VDDD < 3.3 V
–
–
7[63]
MHz
–
–
5.5[63]
MHz
T_SWDI_setup SWDIO input setup before SWDCK high T = 1/f_SWDCK max
T/4
–
–
–
T_SWDI_hold
T = 1/f_SWDCK max
T/4
–
–
–
T = 1/f_SWDCK max
–
–
2T/5
–
f_SWDCK
SWDCLK frequency
1.71 V VDDD < 3.3 V,
SWD over USBIO pins
SWDIO input hold after SWDCK high
T_SWDO_valid SWDCK high to SWDIO output
MHz
11.8.6 SWV Interface
Table 11-73. SWV Interface AC Specifications[62]
Parameter
Description
SWV mode SWV bit rate
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
33
Mbit
Notes
62. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
63. f_SWDCK must also be no more than 1/3 CPU clock frequency.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 111 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.9 Clocking
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,
except where noted.
11.9.1 Internal Main Oscillator
Table 11-74. IMO DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Supply current
62.6 MHz
48 MHz
24 MHz – USB mode
24 MHz – non USB mode
12 MHz
6 MHz
3 MHz
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
600
500
500
300
200
180
150
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
Min
Typ
Max
Units
62.6 MHz
–7
–
7
%
48 MHz
–5
–
5
%
24 MHz – Non USB mode
–4
–
4
%
With oscillator locking to USB bus
Figure 11-71. IMO Current vs. Frequency
Table 11-75. IMO AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Conditions
IMO frequency stability (with factory trim)
FIMO
24 MHz – USB mode
–0.25
–
0.25
%
12 MHz
–3
–
3
%
6 MHz
–2
–
2
%
3 MHz
–1
–
1
%
–
–
13
µs
Startup
time[65]
With oscillator locking to USB bus
From enable (during normal system
operation)
Note
64. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 112 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 11-75. IMO AC Specifications (continued)
Parameter
Description
Min
Typ
Max
Units
F = 24 MHz
–
0.9
–
ns
F = 3 MHz
–
1.6
–
ns
F = 24 MHz
–
0.9
–
ns
F = 3 MHz
–
12
–
ns
Jitter (peak to
Jp–p
Conditions
peak)[65]
Jitter (long term)[65]
Jperiod
Figure 11-72. IMO Frequency Variation vs. Temperature
Figure 11-73. IMO Frequency Variation vs. VCC
Note
65. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 113 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
11.9.2 Internal Low Speed Oscillator
Table 11-76. ILO DC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Operating current
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
FOUT = 1 kHz
–
0.3
1.7
µA
FOUT = 33 kHz
–
1.0
2.6
µA
FOUT = 100 kHz
–
1.0
2.6
µA
Power down mode
–
2.0
15
nA
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
–
2
ms
100 kHz
45
100
200
kHz
1 kHz
0.5
1
2
kHz
100 kHz
30
100
300
kHz
1 kHz
0.3
1
3.5
kHz
ICC
Leakage current
Table 11-77. ILO AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
Startup time, all frequencies
Conditions
Turbo mode
ILO frequencies (trimmed)
FILO
ILO frequencies (untrimmed)
Figure 11-74. ILO Frequency Variation vs. Temperature
Figure 11-75. ILO Frequency Variation vs. VDD
11.9.3 MHz External Crystal Oscillator
Table 11-78. MHzECO AC Specifications
Parameter
F
Description
Conditions
Crystal frequency range
Min
Typ
Max
Units
4
–
25
MHz
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
0.25
1.0
µA
–
–
1
µW
11.9.4 kHz External Crystal Oscillator
Table 11-79. kHzECO DC Specifications[64]
Parameter
Description
ICC
Operating current
DL
Drive level
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Conditions
Low-power mode; CL= 6 pF
Page 114 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 11-80. kHzECO AC Specifications
Parameter
Description
F
Frequency
TON
Startup time
Conditions
High power mode
Min
Typ
Max
Units
–
32.768
–
kHz
–
1
–
s
Min
Typ
Max
Units
0
–
33
MHz
11.9.5 External Clock Reference
Table 11-81. External Clock Reference AC Specifications[68]
Parameter
Description
Conditions
External frequency range
Input duty cycle range
Measured at VDDIO/2
30
50
70
%
Input edge rate
VIL to VIH
0.5
–
–
V/ns
Min
Typ
Max
Units
11.9.6 Phase-Locked Loop
Table 11-82. PLL DC Specifications
Parameter
IDD
Description
PLL operating current
Conditions
In = 3 MHz, Out = 67 MHz
–
400
–
µA
In = 3 MHz, Out = 24 MHz
–
200
–
µA
Min
Typ
Max
Units
1
–
48
MHz
1
–
3
MHz
24
–
67
MHz
Table 11-83. PLL AC Specifications
Parameter
Fpllin
Description
PLL intermediate
Fpllout
Conditions
PLL input frequency[66]
frequency[67]
PLL output frequency[66]
Lock time at startup
Jperiod-rms Jitter (rms)[68]
Output of prescaler
–
–
250
µs
–
–
250
ps
Notes
66. This specification is guaranteed by testing the PLL across the specified range using the IMO as the source for the PLL.
67. PLL input divider, Q, must be set so that the input frequency is divided down to the intermediate frequency range. Value for Q ranges from 1 to 16.
68. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 115 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
12. Ordering Information
In addition to the features listed in Table 12-1, every CY8C36 device includes: a precision on-chip voltage reference, precision
oscillators, flash, ECC, DMA, a fixed function I2C, 4 KB trace RAM, JTAG/SWD programming and debug, external memory interface,
and more. In addition to these features, the flexible UDBs and analog subsection support a wide range of peripherals. To assist you
in selecting the ideal part, PSoC Creator makes a part recommendation after you choose the components required by your application.
All CY8C36 derivatives incorporate device and flash security in user-selectable security levels; see the TRM for details.
Table 12-1. CY8C36 Family with Single Cycle 8051
I/O[71]
EEPROM (KB)
LCD Segment Drive
DAC
Comparator
SC/CT
Analog Blocks[69]
Opamps
DFB
CapSense
UDBs[70]
16-bit Timer/PWM
CY8C3665AXI-010
67
32
4
1
✔ 12-bit Del-Sig
4
4
4
4
✔
✔
20
4
–
– 70 62 8
0
100-pin TQFP
0×1E00A069
CY8C3665PVI-008
67
32
4
1
✔ 12-bit Del-Sig
4
4
4
2
✔
✔
20
4
–
– 29 25 4
0
48-pin SSOP
0×1E008069
CY8C3665AXI-016
67
32
4
1
✔ 12-bit Del-Sig
4
4
4
4
✔
✔
20
4
✔
– 72 62 8
2
100-pin TQFP
0×1E010069
CY8C3665LTI-044
67
32
4
1
✔ 12-bit Del-Sig
4
4
4
4
✔
✔
20
4
✔
–
8
2
68-pin QFN
0×1E02C069
CY8C3665LTI-006
67
32
4
1
✔ 12-bit Del-Sig
4
4
4
2
✔
✔
20
4
✔
– 31 25 4
2
48-pin QFN
0×1E006069
CY8C3665PVI-007
67
32
4
1
✔ 12-bit Del-Sig
4
4
4
2
✔
✔
20
4
✔
– 31 25 4
2
48-pin SSOP
0×1E007069
CY8C3665PVI-080
67
32
4
1
✔ 12-bit Del-Sig
4
4
4
2
✔
✔
20
4
–
✔ 29
4
0
48-pin SSOP
0×1E050069
CY8C3666AXI-052
67
64
8
2
✔ 12-bit Del-Sig
4
4
4
4
✔
✔
24
4
–
– 70 62 8
0
100-pin TQFP
0×1E034069
CY8C3666AXI-036
67
64
8
2
✔ 12-bit Del-Sig
4
4
4
4
✔
✔
24
4
✔
– 72 62 8
2
100-pin TQFP
0×1E024069
CY8C3666LTI-027
67
64
8
2
✔ 12-bit Del-Sig
4
4
4
4
✔
✔
24
4
✔
– 48 38 8
2
68-pin QFN
0×1E01B069
✔
– 31 25 4
2
48-pin QFN
0×1E032069
–
✔ 70
0
100-pin TQFP
0×1E025069
JTAG ID[72]
USBIO
SIO
GPIO
Total I/O
CAN 2.0b
Package
FS USB
Part Number
ADC
SRAM (KB)
Digital
Flash (KB)
Analog
CPU Speed (MHz)
MCU Core
32 KB Flash
48
38
25
64 KB Flash
CY8C3666LTI-050
67
64
8
2
✔ 12-bit Del-Sig
4
4
4
2
✔
✔
24
4
CY8C3666AXI-037
67
64
8
2
✔ 12-bit Del-Sig
4
4
4
4
✔
✔
24
4
62
8
Notes
69. Analog blocks support a wide variety of functionality including TIA, PGA, and mixers. See the Example Peripherals on page 41 for more information on how analog
blocks can be used.
70. UDBs support a wide variety of functionality including SPI, LIN, UART, timer, counter, PWM, PRS, and others. Individual functions may use a fraction of a UDB or
multiple UDBs. Multiple functions can share a single UDB. See the Example Peripherals on page 41 for more information on how UDBs can be used.
71. The I/O Count includes all types of digital I/O: GPIO, SIO, and the two USB I/O. See the I/O System and Routing on page 34 for details on the functionality of each of
these types of I/O.
72. The JTAG ID has three major fields. The most significant nibble (left digit) is the version, followed by a 2 byte part number and a 3 nibble manufacturer ID.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 116 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
12.1 Part Numbering Conventions
PSoC 3 devices follow the part numbering convention described here. All fields are single character alphanumeric (0, 1, 2, …, 9, A,
B, …, Z) unless stated otherwise.
CY8Cabcdefg-xxx
a: Architecture
ef: Package code
3: PSoC 3
5: PSoC 5
Two character alphanumeric
AX: TQFP
LT: QFN
PV: SSOP
b: Family group within architecture
4: CY8C34 family
6: CY8C36 family
8: CY8C38 family
g: Temperature range
C: commercial
I: industrial
A: automotive
c: Speed grade
4: 48 MHz
6: 67 MHz
xxx: Peripheral set
d: Flash capacity
4: 16 KB
5: 32 KB
6: 64 KB
Three character numeric
No meaning is associated with these three characters.
Example
CY8C
3 6 6 6 P V
I
-
x x x
Cypress Prefix
3: PSoC 3
6: CY8C36 Family
Architecture
Family Group within Architecture
6: 67 MHz
Speed Grade
6: 64 KB
Flash Capacity
PV: SSOP
Package Code
I: Industrial
Temperature Range
Peripheral Set
All devices in the PSoC 3 CY8C36 family comply to RoHS-6 specifications, demonstrating the commitment by Cypress to lead-free
products. Lead (Pb) is an alloying element in solders that has resulted in environmental concerns due to potential toxicity. Cypress
uses nickel-palladium-gold (NiPdAu) technology for the majority of leadframe-based packages.
A high level review of the Cypress Pb-free position is available on our website. Specific package information is also available. Package
Material Declaration data sheets (PMDDs) identify all substances contained within Cypress packages. PMDDs also confirm the
absence of many banned substances. The information in the PMDDs will help Cypress customers plan for recycling or other “end of
life” requirements.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 117 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
13. Packaging
Table 13-1. Package Characteristics
Parameter
Description
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
TA
Operating ambient temperature
–40
25.00
85
°C
TJ
Operating junction temperature
–40
–
100
°C
TJA
Package JA (48-pin SSOP)
–
49
–
°C/Watt
TJA
Package JA (48-pin QFN)
–
14
–
°C/Watt
TJA
Package JA (68-pin QFN)
–
15
–
°C/Watt
TJA
Package JA (100-pin TQFP)
–
34
–
°C/Watt
TJC
Package JC (48-pin SSOP)
–
24
–
°C/Watt
TJC
Package JC (48-pin QFN)
–
15
–
°C/Watt
TJC
Package JC (68-pin QFN)
–
13
–
°C/Watt
TJC
Package JC (100-pin TQFP)
–
10
–
°C/Watt
Table 13-2. Solder Reflow Peak Temperature
Package
Maximum Peak
Temperature
Maximum Time at Peak
Temperature
48-pin SSOP
260 °C
30 seconds
48-pin QFN
260 °C
30 seconds
68-pin QFN
260 °C
30 seconds
100-pin TQFP
260 °C
30 seconds
Table 13-3. Package Moisture Sensitivity Level (MSL), IPC/JEDEC J-STD-2
Package
MSL
48-pin SSOP
MSL 3
48-pin QFN
MSL 3
68-pin QFN
MSL 3
100-pin TQFP
MSL 3
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 118 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 13-1. 48-pin (300 mil) SSOP Package Outline
51-85061 *E
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 119 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 13-2. 48-pin QFN Package Outline
001- 45616 *D
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 120 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Figure 13-3. 68-pin QFN 8×8 with 0.4 mm Pitch Package Outline (Sawn Version)
001-09618 *D
Figure 13-4. 100-pin TQFP (14 × 14 × 1.4 mm) Package Outline
51-85048 *G
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 121 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
14. Acronyms
Table 14-1. Acronyms Used in this Document (continued)
Table 14-1. Acronyms Used in this Document
Acronym
Description
Acronym
Description
FIR
finite impulse response, see also IIR
FPB
flash patch and breakpoint
FS
full-speed
GPIO
general-purpose input/output, applies to a PSoC
pin
HVI
high-voltage interrupt, see also LVI, LVD
abus
analog local bus
ADC
analog-to-digital converter
AG
analog global
AHB
AMBA (advanced microcontroller bus architecture) high-performance bus, an ARM data
transfer bus
IC
integrated circuit
ALU
arithmetic logic unit
IDAC
current DAC, see also DAC, VDAC
AMUXBUS
analog multiplexer bus
IDE
integrated development environment
application programming interface
I2C,
API
APSR
application program status register
ARM®
advanced RISC machine, a CPU architecture
ATM
automatic thump mode
BW
bandwidth
CAN
Controller Area Network, a communications
protocol
CMRR
or IIC
Inter-Integrated Circuit, a communications
protocol
IIR
infinite impulse response, see also FIR
ILO
internal low-speed oscillator, see also IMO
IMO
internal main oscillator, see also ILO
INL
integral nonlinearity, see also DNL
I/O
input/output, see also GPIO, DIO, SIO, USBIO
common-mode rejection ratio
IPOR
initial power-on reset
CPU
central processing unit
IPSR
interrupt program status register
CRC
cyclic redundancy check, an error-checking
protocol
IRQ
interrupt request
DAC
digital-to-analog converter, see also IDAC, VDAC
ITM
instrumentation trace macrocell
DFB
digital filter block
LCD
liquid crystal display
DIO
digital input/output, GPIO with only digital
capabilities, no analog. See GPIO.
LIN
Local Interconnect Network, a communications
protocol.
DMA
direct memory access, see also TD
LR
link register
DNL
differential nonlinearity, see also INL
LUT
lookup table
DNU
do not use
LVD
low-voltage detect, see also LVI
DR
port write data registers
LVI
low-voltage interrupt, see also HVI
DSI
digital system interconnect
LVTTL
low-voltage transistor-transistor logic
DWT
data watchpoint and trace
MAC
multiply-accumulate
ECC
error correcting code
MCU
microcontroller unit
ECO
external crystal oscillator
MISO
master-in slave-out
EEPROM
electrically erasable programmable read-only
memory
NC
no connect
NMI
nonmaskable interrupt
NRZ
non-return-to-zero
NVIC
nested vectored interrupt controller
NVL
nonvolatile latch, see also WOL
EMI
electromagnetic interference
EMIF
external memory interface
EOC
end of conversion
EOF
end of frame
EPSR
execution program status register
ESD
electrostatic discharge
ETM
embedded trace macrocell
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
opamp
operational amplifier
PAL
programmable array logic, see also PLD
PC
program counter
PCB
printed circuit board
PGA
programmable gain amplifier
Page 122 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Table 14-1. Acronyms Used in this Document (continued)
Acronym
Description
Table 14-1. Acronyms Used in this Document (continued)
Acronym
Description
PHUB
peripheral hub
SOF
start of frame
PHY
physical layer
SPI
PICU
port interrupt control unit
Serial Peripheral Interface, a communications
protocol
PLA
programmable logic array
SR
slew rate
PLD
programmable logic device, see also PAL
SRAM
static random access memory
PLL
phase-locked loop
SRES
software reset
PMDD
package material declaration data sheet
SWD
serial wire debug, a test protocol
POR
power-on reset
SWV
single-wire viewer
PRES
precise low-voltage reset
TD
transaction descriptor, see also DMA
PRS
pseudo random sequence
THD
total harmonic distortion
PS
port read data register
TIA
transimpedance amplifier
PSoC®
Programmable System-on-Chip™
TRM
technical reference manual
PSRR
power supply rejection ratio
TTL
transistor-transistor logic
PWM
pulse-width modulator
TX
transmit
RAM
random-access memory
UART
Universal Asynchronous Transmitter Receiver, a
communications protocol
UDB
universal digital block
RISC
reduced-instruction-set computing
RMS
root-mean-square
RTC
real-time clock
RTL
register transfer language
RTR
RX
USB
Universal Serial Bus
USBIO
USB input/output, PSoC pins used to connect to
a USB port
remote transmission request
VDAC
voltage DAC, see also DAC, IDAC
receive
WDT
watchdog timer
SAR
successive approximation register
WOL
write once latch, see also NVL
SC/CT
switched capacitor/continuous time
WRES
watchdog timer reset
2C
serial clock
SCL
I
SDA
I2C serial data
S/H
sample and hold
SINAD
signal to noise and distortion ratio
SIO
special input/output, GPIO with advanced
features. See GPIO.
SOC
start of conversion
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
XRES
external reset I/O pin
XTAL
crystal
15. Reference Documents
PSoC® 3, PSoC® 5 Architecture TRM
PSoC® 3 Registers TRM
Page 123 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
16. Document Conventions
16.1 Units of Measure
Table 16-1. Units of Measure
Symbol
Unit of Measure
°C
degrees Celsius
dB
decibels
fF
femtofarads
Hz
hertz
KB
1024 bytes
kbps
kilobits per second
Khr
kilohours
kHz
kilohertz
k
kilohms
ksps
kilosamples per second
LSB
least significant bit
Mbps
megabits per second
MHz
megahertz
M
megaohms
Msps
megasamples per second
µA
microamperes
µF
microfarads
µH
microhenrys
µs
microseconds
µV
microvolts
µW
microwatts
mA
milliamperes
ms
milliseconds
mV
millivolts
nA
nanoamperes
ns
nanoseconds
nV
nanovolts
ohms
pF
picofarads
ppm
parts per million
ps
picoseconds
s
seconds
sps
samples per second
sqrtHz
square root of hertz
V
volts
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 124 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
17. Revision History
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family Data Sheet Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)
Document Number: 001-53413
Submission Orig. of
Revision
ECN
Description of Change
Date
Change
**
2714854
06/04/09
PVKV
New data sheet
*A
2758970
09/02/09
MKEA
Updated Part Numbering Conventions
Added Section 11.7.5 (EMIF Figures and Tables)
Updated GPIO and SIO AC specifications
Updated XRES Pin Description and Xdata Address Map specifications
Updated DFB and Comparator specifications
Updated PHUB features section and RTC in sleep mode
Updated IDAC and VDAC DC and Analog Global specifications
Updated USBIO AC and Delta Sigma ADC specifications
Updated PPOR and Voltage Monitors DC specifications
Updated Drive Mode diagram
Added 48-QFN Information
Updated other electrical specifications
*B
2824546
12/09/09
MKEA
Updated I2C section to reflect 1 Mbps. Updated Table 11-6 and 11-7 (Boost AC
and DC specs); also added Shottky Diode specs. Changed current for
sleep/hibernate mode to include SIO; Added footnote to analog global specs.
Updated Figures 1-1, 6-2, 7-14, and 8-1. Updated Table 6-2 and Table 6-3
(Hibernate and Sleep rows) and Power Modes section. Updated GPIO and SIO
AC specifications. Updated Gain error in IDAC and VDAC specifications.
Updated description of VDDA spec in Table 11-1 and removed GPIO Clamp
Current parameter. Updated number of UDBs on page 1.
Moved FILO from ILO DC to AC table.
Added PCB Layout and PCB Schematic diagrams.
Updated Fgpioout spec (Table 11-9). Added duty cycle frequency in PLL AC spec
table. Added note for Sleep and Hibernate modes and Active Mode specs in Table
11-2. Linked URL in Section 10.3 to PSoC Creator site.
Updated Ja and Jc values in Table 13-1. Updated Single Sample Mode and Fast
FIR Mode sections. Updated Input Resistance specification in Del-Sig ADC table.
Added Tio_init parameter. Updated PGA and UGB AC Specs. Removed SPC
ADC. Updated Boost Converter section.
Added section 'SIO as Comparator'; updated Hysteresis spec (differential mode)
in Table 11-10.
Updated VBAT condition and deleted Vstart parameter in Table 11-6.
Added 'Bytes' column for Tables 4-1 to 4-5.
*C
2873322
02/04/10
MKEA
Changed maximum value of PPOR_TR to '1'. Updated VBIAS specification.
Updated PCB Schematic. Updated Figure 8-1 and Figure 6-3. Updated Interrupt
Vector table, Updated Sales links. Updated JTAG and SWD specifications.
Removed Jp-p and Jperiod from ECO AC Spec table. Added note on sleep timer
in Table 11-2. Updated ILO AC and DC specifications. Added Resolution
parameter in VDAC and IDAC tables. Updated IOUT typical and maximum values.
Changed Temperature Sensor range to –40 °C to +85 °C. Removed Latchup
specification from Table 11-1.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 125 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family Data Sheet Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)
Document Number: 001-53413
Submission Orig. of
Revision
ECN
Description of Change
Date
Change
*D
2903576
04/01/10
MKEA
Updated Vb pin in PCB Schematic
Updated Tstartup parameter in AC Specifications table
Added Load regulation and Line regulation parameters to Inductive Boost
Regulator DC Specifications table
Updated ICC parameter in LCD Direct Drive DC Specs table
Updated IOUT parameter in LCD Direct Drive DC Specs table
Updated Table 6-2 and Table 6-3
Added bullets on CapSense in page 1; added CapSense column in Section 12
Removed some references to footnote [1]
Changed INC_Rn cycles from 3 to 2 (Table 4-1)
Added footnote in PLL AC Specification table
Added PLL intermediate frequency row with footnote in PLL AC Specs table
Added UDBs subsection under 11.6 Digital Peripherals
Updated Figure 2-6 (PCB Layout)
Updated Pin Descriptions section and modified Figures 6-6, 6-8, 6-9
Updated LVD in Tables 6-2 and 6-3; modified Low-power modes bullet in page 1
Added note to Figures 2-5 and 6-2; Updated Figure 6-2 to add capacitors for VDDA
and VDDD pins.
Changed VREF from 0.9 to 0.1%
Updated boost converter section (6.2.2)
Updated Tstartup values in Table 11-3.
Removed IPOR rows from Table 11-68. Updated 6.3.1.1, Power Voltage Level
Monitors.
Updated section 5.2 and Table 11-2 to correct suggestion of execution from flash.
Updated VREF specs in Table 11-21.
Updated IDAC uncompensated gain error in Table 11-25.
Updated Delay from Interrupt signal input to ISR code execution from ISR code
in Table11- 72. Removed other line in table.
Added sentence to last paragraph of section 6.1.1.3.
Updated TRESP, high and low-power modes, in Table 11-24.
Updated f_TCK values in Table 11-73 and f_SWDCK values in Table 11-74.
Updated SNR condition in Table 11-20.
Corrected unit of measurement in Table 11-21.
Updated sleep wakeup time in Table 6-3 and Tsleep in Table 11-3.
Added 1.71 V <= VDDD < 3.3 V, SWD over USBIO pins value to Table 11-74.
Removed mention of hibernate reset (HRES) from page 1 features, Table 6-3,
Section 6.2.1.4, Section 6.3, and Section 6.3.1.1. Change PPOR/PRES to TBDs
in Section 6.3.1.1, Section 6.4.1.6 (changed PPOR to reset), Table 11-3 (changed
PPOR to PRES), Table 11-68 (changed title, values TBD), and Table 11-69
(changed PPOR_TR to PRES_TR).
Added sentence saying that LVD
circuits can generate a reset to Section 6.3.1.1.
Changed IDD values on page 1, page 5, and Table 11-2.
Changed resume time value in Section 6.2.1.3.
Changed ESD HBM value in Table 11-1.
Changed sample rate row in Table 11-20.
Removed VDDA = 1.65 V rows and changed BWag value in Table 11-22.
Changed VIOFF values and changed CMRR value in Table 11-23.
Changed INL max value in Table 11-27.
Added max value to the Quiescent current specs in Tables 11-29 and 11-31.
Changed occurrences of “Block” to “Row” and deleted the “ECC not included”
footnote in Table 11-57.
Changed max response time value in Tables 11-69 and 11-71.
Changed the Startup time in Table 11-79.
Added condition to intermediate frequency row in Table 11-85.
Added row to Table 11-69.
Added brown out note to Section 11.8.1.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 126 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family Data Sheet Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)
Document Number: 001-53413
Submission Orig. of
Revision
ECN
Description of Change
Date
Change
*E
2938381
05/27/10
MKEA
Replaced VDDIO with VDDD in USBIO diagram and specification tables, added
text in USBIO section of Electrical Specifications.
Added Table 13-2 (Package MSL)
Modified Tstorag condition and changed max spec to 100
Added bullet (Pass) under ALU (section 7.2.2.2)
Added figures for kHzECO and MHzECO in the External Oscillator section
Updated Figure 6-1(Clocking Subsystem diagram)
Removed CPUCLK_DIV in table 5-2, Deleted Clock Divider SFR subsection
Updated PSoC Creator Framework image
Updated SIO DC Specifications (VIH and VIL parameters)
Updated bullets in Clocking System and Clocking Distribution sections
Updated Figure 8-2
Updated PCB Layout and Schematic, updated as per MTRB review comments
Updated Table 6-3 (power changed to current)
In 32kHZ EC DC Specifications table, changed ICC Max to 0.25
In IMO DC Specifications table, updated Supply Current values
Updated GPIO DC Specs table
*F
2958674
06/22/10
SHEA
Minor ECN to post data sheet to external website
*G
2989685
08/04/10
MKEA
Added USBIO 22 ohm DP and DM resistors to Simplified Block Diagram
Added to Table 6-6 a footnote and references to same.
Added sentences to the resistive pull-up and pull-down description bullets.
Added sentence to Section 6.4.11, Adjustable Output Level.
Updated section 5.5 External Memory Interface
Updated Table 11-73 JTAG Interface AC Specifications
Updated Table 11-74 SWD Interface AC Specifications
Updated style changes as per the new template.
*H
3078568
11/04/10
MKEA
Updated “Current Digital-to-analog Converter (IDAC)” on page 88
Updated “Voltage Digital to Analog Converter (VDAC)” on page 93
Updated “DC Specifications” on page 68
Updated “Voltage Reference Specifications” on page 87
*I
3107314 12/10/2010
MKEA
Updated delta-sigma tables and graphs.
Updated Flash AC specs
Formatted table 11.2.
Updated interrupt controller table
Updated transimpedance amplifier section
Updated SIO DC specs table
Updated Voltage Monitors DC Specifications table
Updated LCD Direct Drive DC specs table
Replaced the Discrete Time Mixer and Continuous Time Mixer tables with Mixer
DC and AC specs tables
Updated ESDHBM value.
Updated IDAC and VDAC sections
Removed ESO parts from ordering information
Changed USBIO pins from NC to DNU and removed redundant USBIO pin
description notes
Updated POR with brown out DC and AC specs
Updated PGA AC specs
Updated 32 kHz External Crystal DC Specifications
Updated opamp AC specs
Updated XRES IO specs
Updated Inductive boost regulator section
Delta sigma ADC spec updates
Updated comparator section
Removed buzz mode from Power Mode Transition diagram
Updated opamp DC and AC spec tables
Updated PGA DC table
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 127 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family Data Sheet Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)
Document Number: 001-53413
Submission Orig. of
Revision
ECN
Description of Change
Date
Change
*J
3179219
02/22/2011
MKEA
Updated conditions for flash data retention time.
Updated 100-pin TQFP package spec.
Updated EEPROM AC specifications.
*K
3200146
03/28/2011
MKEA
Removed Preliminary status from the data sheet.
Updated JTAG ID
Deleted Cin_G1, ADC input capacitance from Delta-Sigma ADC DC spec table
Updated JTAG Interface AC Specifications and SWD Interface Specifications
tables
Updated USBIO DC specs
Added 0.01 to max speed
Updated Features on page 1
Added Section 5.5, Nonvolatile Latches
Updated Flash AC specs
Added CAN DC specs
Updated delta-sigma graphs, noise histogram figures and RMS Noise spec tables
Add reference to application note AN58304 in section 8.1
Updated 100-pin TQFP package spec
Added oscillator, I/O, VDAC, regulator graphs
Updated JTAG/SWD timing diagrams
Updated GPIO and SIO AC specs
Updated POR with Brown Out AC spec table
Updated IDAC graphs
Added DMA timing diagram, interrupt timing and interrupt vector, I2C timing
diagrams
Updated opamp graphs and PGA graphs
Added full chip performance graphs
Changed MHzECO range.
Added “Solder Reflow Peak Temperature” table.
*L
3259185
05/17/2011
MKEA
Added JTAG and SWD interface connection diagrams
Updated TJA and TJC values in Table 13-1
Changed typ and max values for the TCVos parameter in Opamp DC
specifications table.
Updated Clocking subsystem diagram.
Changed VSSD to VSSB in the PSoC Power System diagram
Updated Ordering information.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 128 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family Data Sheet Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)
Document Number: 001-53413
Submission Orig. of
Revision
ECN
Description of Change
Date
Change
*M
3464258
12/14/2011
MKEA
Updated Analog Global specs
Updated IDAC range
Updated TIA section
Modified VDDIO description in Section 3
Added note on Sleep and Hibernate modes in the Power Modes section
Updated Boost Converter section
Updated conditions for Inductive boost AC specs
Added VDAC/IDAC noise graphs and specs
Added pin capacitance specs for ECO pins
Removed CL from 32 kHz External Crystal DC Specs table.
Added reference to AN54439 in Section 6.1.2.2
Deleted T_SWDO_hold row from the SWD Interface AC Specifications table
Removed Pin 46 connections in “Example Schematic for 100-pin TQFP Part with
Power Connections”
Updated Active Mode IDD description in Table 11-2.
Added IDDDR and IDDAR specs in Table 11-2.
Replaced “total device program time” with TPROG in Flash AC specs table
Added IGPIO, ISIO and IUSBIO specs in Absolute Maximum Ratings
Added conditions to ICC spec in 32 kHz External Crystal DC Specs table.
Updated TCVOS value
Removed Boost Efficiency vs VOUT graph
Updated boost graphs
Updated min value of GPIO input edge rate
Removed 3.4 Mbps in UDBs from I2C section
Updated USBIO Block diagram; added USBIO drive mode description
Updated Analog Interconnect diagram
Changed max IMO startup time to 12 µs
Added note for IIL spec in USBIO DC specs table
Updated GPIO Block diagram
Updated voltage reference specs
Added text explaining power supply ramp up in Section 11-4.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 129 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family Data Sheet Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)
Document Number: 001-53413
Submission Orig. of
Revision
ECN
Description of Change
Date
Change
*N
3645908 06/14/2012
MKEA
Added paragraph clarifying that to achieve low hibernate current, you must limit
the frequency of IO input signals.
Revised description of IPOR and clarified PRES term.
Changed footnote to state that all GPIO input voltages - not just analog voltages
- must be less than Vddio.
Updated 100-TQFP package drawing
Clarified description of opamp Iout spec
Changed “compliant with I2C” to “compatible with I2C”
Updated 48-QFN package drawing
Changed reset status register description text to clarify that not all reset sources
are in the register
Updated example PCB layout figure
Removed text stating that FTW is a wakeup source
Changed supply ramp rate spec from 1 V/ns to 0.066 V/µs
Added “based on char” footnote to voltage monitors response time spec
Changed analog global spec descriptions and values
Added spec for ESDhbm for when Vssa and Vssd are separate
Added a statement about support for JTAG programmers and file formats
Changed comparator specs and conditions
Added text describing flash cache, and updated related text
Changed text and added figures describing Vddio source and sink
Added a statement about support for JTAG programmers and file formats.
Changed comparator specs and conditions
Added text on adjustability of buzz frequency
Updated terminology for “master” and “system” clock
Deleted the text “debug operations are possible while the device is reset”
Deleted and updated text regarding SIO performance under certain power ramp
conditions
Removed from boost mention of 22 µH inductors. This included deleting some
graph figures.
Changed DAC high and low speed/power mode descriptions and conditions
Changed IMO startup time spec
Added text on XRES and PRES re-arm times
Added text about usage in externally regulated mode
Updated package diagram spec 001-45616 to *D revision.
Changed supply ramp rate spec from 1 V/ns to 0.066 V/µs
Changed text describing SIO modes for overvoltage tolerance
Added chip Idd specs for active and low-power modes, for multiple voltage,
temperature and usage conditions
Added chip Idd specs for active and low-power modes, for multiple voltage,
temperature and usage conditions
Updated Vref temperature drift specs. Added Vref graphs and footnote.
Updated DFB description text
Changed load cap conditions in opamp specs
Updated del-sig ADC spec tables, to replace three the instances of “16 bit” with
“12 bit”
Updated package diagram spec 001-45616 to *D revision
*O
3648803 06/18/2012
WKA/
No changes. EROS update.
MKEA
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
Page 130 of 131
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family
Data Sheet
18. Sales, Solutions, and Legal Information
Worldwide Sales and Design Support
Cypress maintains a worldwide network of offices, solution centers, manufacturers’ representatives, and distributors. To find the office
closest to you, visit us at Cypress Locations.
Products
PSoC Solutions
Automotive
Clocks & Buffers
Interface
cypress.com/go/automotive
psoc.cypress.com/solutions
cypress.com/go/clocks
PSoC 1 | PSoC 3 | PSoC 5
cypress.com/go/interface
Lighting & Power Control
cypress.com/go/powerpsoc
cypress.com/go/plc
Memory
cypress.com/go/memory
Optical & Image Sensing
cypress.com/go/image
PSoC
cypress.com/go/psoc
Touch Sensing
cypress.com/go/touch
USB Controllers
cypress.com/go/USB
Wireless/RF
cypress.com/go/wireless
© Cypress Semiconductor Corporation, 2009-2012. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Cypress Semiconductor Corporation assumes no responsibility for the use of
any circuitry other than circuitry embodied in a Cypress product. Nor does it convey or imply any license under patent or other rights. Cypress products are not warranted nor intended to be used for
medical, life support, life saving, critical control or safety applications, unless pursuant to an express written agreement with Cypress. Furthermore, Cypress does not authorize its products for use as
critical components in life-support systems where a malfunction or failure may reasonably be expected to result in significant injury to the user. The inclusion of Cypress products in life-support systems
application implies that the manufacturer assumes all risk of such use and in doing so indemnifies Cypress against all charges.
Any Source Code (software and/or firmware) is owned by Cypress Semiconductor Corporation (Cypress) and is protected by and subject to worldwide patent protection (United States and foreign),
United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Cypress hereby grants to licensee a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to copy, use, modify, create derivative works of,
and compile the Cypress Source Code and derivative works for the sole purpose of creating custom software and or firmware in support of licensee product to be used only in conjunction with a Cypress
integrated circuit as specified in the applicable agreement. Any reproduction, modification, translation, compilation, or representation of this Source Code except as specified above is prohibited without
the express written permission of Cypress.
Disclaimer: CYPRESS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Cypress reserves the right to make changes without further notice to the materials described herein. Cypress does not
assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein. Cypress does not authorize its products for use as critical components in life-support systems where
a malfunction or failure may reasonably be expected to result in significant injury to the user. The inclusion of Cypress’ product in a life-support systems application implies that the manufacturer
assumes all risk of such use and in doing so indemnifies Cypress against all charges.
Use may be limited by and subject to the applicable Cypress software license agreement.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *O
®
®
®
®
Revised June 18, 2012
®
Page 131 of 131
CapSense , PSoC 3, PSoC 5, and PSoC Creator™ are trademarks and PSoC is a registered trademark of Cypress Semiconductor Corp. All other trademarks or registered trademarks referenced
herein are property of the respective corporations.
Purchase of I2C components from Cypress or one of its sublicensed Associated Companies conveys a license under the Philips I2C Patent Rights to use these components in an I2C system, provided
that the system conforms to the I2C Standard Specification as defined by Philips.
ARM is a registered trademark, and Keil, and RealView are trademarks, of ARM Limited. All products and company names mentioned in this document may be the trademarks of their respective holders.